Samsung | OfficeServ 12 | Installation guide | Samsung OfficeServ 12 Installation guide

+
12 Programming Guide
COPYRIGHT
This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. and is protected by copyright.
No information contained herein may be copied, translated, transcribed or duplicated for any
commercial purposes or disclosed to third parties in any form without the prior written consent
of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
TRADEMARKS
OfficeServ 12™ is the trademark of SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks and/or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.
Please read this guide before using the OfficeServ 12 system, and follow the instructions to use the OfficeServ 12
system safely and correctly.
This manual may be changed for the product improvement, standardization and other technical reasons without prior
notice.
For further information on the updated manual or have a question the content of manual, contact your Authorised
Samsung Reseller.
©2003 SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
INTRODUCTION
Purpose
This guide is a programming description for OfficeServ 12 system users.
OfficeServ 12 allows you to utilize a digital phone to simply change the system
setup. Likewise, using a phone to change the system setup is called MMC(Man
Machine Communication) program.
This guide describes how to use a digital phone to use MMC. When there are
questions about OfficeServ 12 system or damage to the phone, please call your
authorised Samsung reseller.
Document Content and Organization
This programming guide is composed of a total of 2 chapters. Each chapter is
introduced as follows :
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
This chapter describes things to know before starting MMC programming and about
the buttons of digital phone and cautions.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This chapter describes how to use each MMC program as it was listed.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page I
Introduction
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this document to point out information
that must be read.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
CHECKPOINT
Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation.
NOTE
Indicates additional information as a reference.
Reference
OfficeServ 12 Installation Guide
Introduces the installation related information for OfficeServ 12 system.
WIP-5000M User Guide
This is a user’s guide for WIP-5000M that is designed to use wireless LAN provided
from the OfficeServ 12 system.
Revision History
Page II
EDITION
DATE OF ISSUE
REMARKS
00
09. 2003.
First Draft
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
SAFETY CONCERNS
For product safety and correct operation, the following information must be given to
the operator/user and shall be read before the installation and operation.
Symbols
Caution
Indication of a general caution
Restriction
Indication for prohibiting an action for a product
Instruction
Indication for commanding a specifically required action
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page III
Safety Concerns
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CAUTION
Trunk Member Deletion
One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk member
from other groups to prevent accidental access.
Digital Phone Volume Control
‘Program 807 Digital Phone Voice Quality Control ‘ seriously affects the system
credibility. Please call the reseller where you purchased the product to get an expert’s
advice.
Compliance with the National Version Standard
For the national version, OfficeServ 12 is designed to comply with the standard of the
corresponding country.
Page IV
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
Purpose ...................................................................................................................................I
Document Content and Organization ......................................................................................I
Conventions............................................................................................................................II
Reference ...............................................................................................................................II
Revision History......................................................................................................................II
Symbols .................................................................................................................................III
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
1
Introduction to Programming.......................................................................................... 1-1
2
Phone Buttons .................................................................................................................. 1-2
3
Cautions in Programming................................................................................................ 1-6
4
Program List...................................................................................................................... 1-7
5
Overview of Programming Procedure.......................................................................... 1-14
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
100 Station Lock ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
101 Change User Passcode.................................................................................................... 2-4
102 Call Forward ...................................................................................................................... 2-5
103 Set Answer Mode.............................................................................................................. 2-7
104 Station Name..................................................................................................................... 2-9
105 Station Speed Dial ...........................................................................................................2-11
106 Station Speed Dial Name ............................................................................................... 2-13
107 Key Extender................................................................................................................... 2-15
108 Station Status.................................................................................................................. 2-18
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page V
Table of Contents
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
109 Date Display .................................................................................................................... 2-20
110 Station On/Off ................................................................................................................. 2-22
111 Phone Ring Tone ............................................................................................................ 2-24
112 Alarm Reminder Clock ................................................................................................... 2-25
113 View Memo Number........................................................................................................ 2-27
114 Phone Volume ................................................................................................................. 2-29
115 Set Programmed Message............................................................................................. 2-31
116 Alarm And Message ....................................................................................................... 2-32
117 Edit Text Message........................................................................................................... 2-35
118 Conference Group .......................................................................................................... 2-37
119 Caller ID Display ............................................................................................................. 2-39
121 Phone Language............................................................................................................. 2-41
122 News Display Speed....................................................................................................... 2-43
125 EXECUTIVE STATE ......................................................................................................... 2-44
200 Open Customer Programming ...................................................................................... 2-46
201 Change Customer Passcode ......................................................................................... 2-48
202 Change Feature Passcode............................................................................................. 2-49
203 Assign UA Device ........................................................................................................... 2-51
204 Common Bell Control..................................................................................................... 2-52
205 Assign Loud Bell ............................................................................................................ 2-54
206 Barge-In Type .................................................................................................................. 2-55
207 Assign VM/AA Port ......................................................................................................... 2-56
208 Assign Ring Type............................................................................................................ 2-58
209 Assign Add-On Module .................................................................................................. 2-60
210 Customer On/Off per Tenant.......................................................................................... 2-61
211 Door Ring Assignment................................................................................................... 2-65
214 DISA Alarm Ringing Station .......................................................................................... 2-67
217 Traffic Report Option...................................................................................................... 2-68
219 Common Relay Service Type......................................................................................... 2-70
220 ISDN Service Type .......................................................................................................... 2-71
300 Customer On/Off per Station ......................................................................................... 2-72
Page VI
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Table of Contents
301 Assign Station COS........................................................................................................ 2-74
302 Pickup Groups ................................................................................................................ 2-76
303 ASSIGN BOSS/SECRETARY.......................................................................................... 2-78
304 Assign Extension/Trunk Use ......................................................................................... 2-80
305 Assign Forced Code....................................................................................................... 2-82
306 Hot Line/Off Hook Selection .......................................................................................... 2-84
308 Assign Background Music Source ............................................................................... 2-85
309 Assign Station MOH Source.......................................................................................... 2-87
310 LCR Class Of Service..................................................................................................... 2-89
312 Allow Caller ID................................................................................................................. 2-90
314 Confirm Outgoing Call ................................................................................................... 2-92
315 Customer Set Relocation............................................................................................... 2-94
316 Copy Station/Trunk Use ................................................................................................. 2-97
317 Assign Station/Station Use............................................................................................ 2-98
318 Distinctive Ringing ....................................................................................................... 2-100
319 Branch Group................................................................................................................ 2-102
320 Preset Forward No Answer.......................................................................................... 2-103
323 Calling Party Number ................................................................................................... 2-105
400 Customer On/Off per Trunk ......................................................................................... 2-107
401 Trunk Line/PBX Line..................................................................................................... 2-109
402 Trunk Dial Type ............................................................................................................. 2-110
403 Trunk Toll Class .............................................................................................................2-111
404 Trunk Name ................................................................................................................... 2-113
405 Trunk C.O Telephone Number ..................................................................................... 2-115
406 Trunk Ring Assignment ............................................................................................... 2-117
407 Forced Trunk Release .................................................................................................. 2-119
408 Assign Trunk MOH Source .......................................................................................... 2-120
409 Trunk Status Read ........................................................................................................ 2-121
410 Assign DISA Trunk ....................................................................................................... 2-123
414 PRS Signal..................................................................................................................... 2-125
415 Report Trunk Abandon Data........................................................................................ 2-127
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page VII
Table of Contents
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
418 BRI CARD RESTART .................................................................................................... 2-129
419 BRI Options ................................................................................................................... 2-130
421 MSN Digit ....................................................................................................................... 2-134
422 Trunk COS ..................................................................................................................... 2-136
423 Station/Trunk Mode ...................................................................................................... 2-138
424 BRI S0 Mapping ............................................................................................................ 2-139
425 Assign Caller ID Trunks ............................................................................................... 2-140
426 Trunk Gain Control ....................................................................................................... 2-142
428 Assign Trunk/Trunk Use............................................................................................... 2-143
434 Connection Status ........................................................................................................ 2-145
436 Trunk TMC Gain ............................................................................................................ 2-148
500 System-Wide Counters ................................................................................................ 2-150
501 System Timers .............................................................................................................. 2-153
502 Station-Wide Timers ..................................................................................................... 2-158
503 Trunk-Wide Timer.......................................................................................................... 2-160
504 Pulse Make/Break Ratio ............................................................................................... 2-162
505 Assign Date And Time.................................................................................................. 2-163
506 Tone Cadence................................................................................................................ 2-164
507 Assign Ring Plan Time................................................................................................. 2-167
508 Call Cost ........................................................................................................................ 2-169
510 SLI Ring Cadence ......................................................................................................... 2-171
512 Holiday Assignment ..................................................................................................... 2-173
514 Tone Source .................................................................................................................. 2-175
515 Assign Daylight Saving Date ....................................................................................... 2-177
600 Assign Operator Group................................................................................................ 2-179
601 Assign Station Group................................................................................................... 2-180
602 Station Group Name ..................................................................................................... 2-183
603 Assign Trunk Group ..................................................................................................... 2-185
604 Assign Station To Page Zone ...................................................................................... 2-187
605 Assign External Page Zone ............................................................................................ 2-188
606 Assign Speed Block ..................................................................................................... 2-190
Page VIII
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Table of Contents
608 Assign Review Block ................................................................................................... 2-192
609 Call Log Block............................................................................................................... 2-193
611 Allow Text Messaging .................................................................................................. 2-194
612 Allow Group Conference ............................................................................................. 2-195
614 Station/Trunk Use Group ............................................................................................. 2-196
615 MGI Group ..................................................................................................................... 2-198
616 MGI User ........................................................................................................................ 2-200
700 Copy COS Contents ..................................................................................................... 2-202
701 Assign COS Contents .................................................................................................. 2-203
702 Toll Deny Table.............................................................................................................. 2-207
703 Toll Allowance Table..................................................................................................... 2-209
704 Assign Wild Character ................................................................................................. 2-211
705 Assign System Speed Dial .......................................................................................... 2-212
706 System Speed Dial By Name ....................................................................................... 2-214
707 Authorization Code....................................................................................................... 2-216
708 Account Code ............................................................................................................... 2-217
709 Toll Pass Code/Special Code Table ............................................................................ 2-218
710 LCR Digit Table ............................................................................................................. 2-220
711 LCR Time Table............................................................................................................. 2-222
712 LCR Route Table ........................................................................................................... 2-224
713 LCR Modify Digit Table ................................................................................................ 2-226
714 DID Number And Name Translation............................................................................ 2-228
715 Programmed Station Message .................................................................................... 2-232
716 UK LCR OPTIONS ......................................................................................................... 2-234
718 MY Area Code ............................................................................................................... 2-236
720 Copy Key Programming............................................................................................... 2-237
721 Save Station Key Programming .................................................................................. 2-238
722 Station Key Programming ........................................................................................... 2-239
723 System Key Programming........................................................................................... 2-243
724 Dial Numbering Plan .................................................................................................... 2-245
725 SMDR Options .............................................................................................................. 2-250
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page IX
Table of Contents
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
726 VM/AA Options.............................................................................................................. 2-253
727 System Version Display ............................................................................................... 2-259
728 CID Translation Table ................................................................................................... 2-260
740 Station Pair .................................................................................................................... 2-262
750 VM System Restart ....................................................................................................... 2-264
751 Assign Mailbox ............................................................................................................. 2-266
752 Auto Record .................................................................................................................. 2-268
753 Warning Destination ..................................................................................................... 2-270
754 VM Halt........................................................................................................................... 2-271
755 VM Alarm ....................................................................................................................... 2-272
756 Assign VM MOH ............................................................................................................ 2-273
757 VM In/Out ....................................................................................................................... 2-275
800 Enable Technician Program......................................................................................... 2-276
801 Change Technician Passcode ..................................................................................... 2-278
802 Customer Access MMC Number ................................................................................. 2-279
803 Assign Tenant Group ................................................................................................... 2-280
805 Level And Gain.............................................................................................................. 2-282
807 Phone Volume Control ................................................................................................. 2-285
809 System MMC Language ............................................................................................... 2-288
811 Reset System ................................................................................................................ 2-289
812 Set Country Code ......................................................................................................... 2-291
815 Customer Database Copy ............................................................................................ 2-292
816 Conference Gain ........................................................................................................... 2-294
818 Program Download....................................................................................................... 2-296
820 Assign System Link ID ................................................................................................. 2-297
822 Set Virtual Extension Type........................................................................................... 2-299
823 Assign Network COS.................................................................................................... 2-301
824 Network Dial Translation.............................................................................................. 2-303
825 Assign Networking Option .......................................................................................... 2-305
829 LAN Printer Parameter ................................................................................................. 2-306
830 Ethernet Parameters..................................................................................................... 2-308
832 VOIP Access Code........................................................................................................ 2-311
Page X
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Table of Contents
833 VoIP IP Table ................................................................................................................. 2-313
834 H.323 Options................................................................................................................ 2-315
835 MGI DSP Options .......................................................................................................... 2-317
836 H.323 GK Options ......................................................................................................... 2-320
837 SIP Options ................................................................................................................... 2-322
840 IP Phone Information ................................................................................................... 2-325
841 System IP Options........................................................................................................ 2-328
845 WLAN PARA .................................................................................................................. 2-331
846 WIP INFO ....................................................................................................................... 2-335
847 WBS RESET .................................................................................................................. 2-337
848 WIP LIST ........................................................................................................................ 2-338
849 WLAN REGIST............................................................................................................... 2-339
850 System Resource Display............................................................................................ 2-341
851 Alarm Reporting............................................................................................................ 2-342
852 System Alarm Assignments ........................................................................................ 2-344
853 Maintenance Busy ........................................................................................................ 2-346
856 Tech Programming Logs.............................................................................................. 2-348
858 Assign System Emergency Alarm .............................................................................. 2-350
861 System Options ............................................................................................................ 2-351
890 Initialize Port ................................................................................................................. 2-353
ABBREVIATION
A ~ D ................................................................................................................. Abbreviation-1
F ~ P ................................................................................................................. Abbreviation-2
Q ~ W ............................................................................................................... Abbreviation-3
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone .............................................................................. 1-2
Figure 1.2 DS-4028E Phone ............................................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1.3 DS-5038D Phone ............................................................................................. 1-4
Figure 1.4 DS-5021D/ITP-5021D Phone........................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1.5 DS-5014D/ITP-5014D Phone........................................................................... 1-5
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page XI
Table of Contents
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
This page is intentionally left blank.
Page XII
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CHAPTER 1
Before Programming
In this chapter, the things to know before you start MMC programming, and the
phone buttons and cautions will be discussed.
1
Introduction to Programming
The MMC program means the changes on the data that is used for the system
operation program. There are 3 levels of MMC programming, such as technician,
operator, and station levels. According to the programming level, the station can
program or cannot program the data change. The technician level programming and
the operator level programming require a passcode for each level while the station
level programming does not require a passcode.
1.1
Technician Level Program
This level is allowed to program every level of program.
This level of programming can be done on every phone within the system, but it can
be done for only one phone at a time.
1.2
Operator Level Program
An technician can do programming within the range set by the MMC 802-Operator
Program Range Setting.
Programming is allowed for any phone within the tenant group, but it can be done for
only one phone at a time.
1.3
Station Level Program
Programming can be done for only station level programs.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
2
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Phone Buttons
There are several phones that are allowed for MMC programming ; DCS Euro
phones(24B/12B/6B LCD), DS-4000 series phones(DS-4028E, DS-4018E, DS4008E), DS-5000D series phone(DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS-5014D) and ITP-5000D
series phone(ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D)
2.1
DCS Euro phones
The following figure shows the shape of 24B/12B LCD DCS Euro phone.
Volume Control Buttons
Volume control for handset,
Ring, speaker, etc
Soft Buttons(3)
Scroll Button
Used activate
Features via the display
Used to select start menu and
scroll through display options
Programmable Buttons
With tri-coloured LEDs :
SCROLL
24B phone as 16 Buttons
12B phone has 8 Buttons
VOLUME
REDIAL MEMORY
DND SPEAKER
Redial Button
Memory Button
DND Button
Speaker Button
TRSF RECALL
HOLD
ANS/RLS
Programmable Buttons
With red LEDs :
24B phone as 16 Buttons
12B phone has 8 Buttons
Speaker
For hands-free operation.
Used in place of handset
Microphone
Pullout Directory Tray
Transfer Button
Hold Button
ANS/RLS Button
Recall Button
Figure 1.1 24B LCD DCS Euro Phone
24B LCD phone has 24 programmable buttons : left column is numbered 1-12 from
the top; right column is numbered 13-24 from the top.
12B LCD phone has 12 programmable buttons numbered 1-12 from top to bottom.
By default : Button 1 and 2 are set as CALL buttons. CALL buttons flash for
incoming calls. Button 24(24B LCD phone) or button 12(12B LCD phone) is set as
Page 1-2
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
MSG button. The MSG button flashes to indicate message waiting.
When MMC programming, other functions programmed on the programmable buttons
are as follows :
!
!
!
!
!
!
2.2
ANS/RLS Button : Answer and release calls
Hold Button : Hold Calls
Memory Button : Speed dialing button
Redial Button : Last number redial
Transfer Button : Transfer current call(or enter MMC programming mode)
Speaker Button : Switch on speakerphone
DS-4000 Series phones
The following figure shows the shape of DS-4028E phone among DS-4000 series
phones.
LCD Display
Left Soft Button
Right Soft Button
A Button
B Button
Dial Buttons
Transfer Button
Speaker Button
ANS/RLS Button
Volume Buttons
Hold Button
Figure 1.2 DS-4028E Phone
Among 3 Soft buttons, the first one is called the ‘Left Soft button’, which is used to
save the modified data or to move the cursor inside the LCD display in the left
direction.
Among 3 Soft buttons, the third one is called the ‘Right Soft button’, which is used to
save the modified data or to move the cursor in the right direction.
Among 8 programmable buttons, the first 6 programmable buttons are assigned as
‘A’-‘F’ to carry out specific functions or usage while programming. Generally, these
buttons perform specific functions that you set for each corresponding button.
When MMC programming, other functions programmed on the programmable buttons
are as follows :
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-3
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
2.3
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Volume Button : Search the selected items.
Soft Buttons : Move the cursor
Speaker Button : Save data and proceed to the next program
Hold Button : Erase the previously entered item
A Button : Select either a capital letter or small letter
B Button : Select either a Korean character or English character
Transfer Button : Enter the programming code
DS / ITP-5000D Series Phones
There are several DS/ITP-5000D series phones, such as DS-5038D, DS-5021D, DS5014D, ITP-5021D, ITP-5014D as shown in the figures below :
A Button
B Button
LCD Display
Programmable Buttons(21)
Soft buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Programmable Buttons(17)
Dial Buttons
Microphone
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Hold Button
Figure 1.3 DS-5038D Phone
A Button
B Button
LCD Display
Programmable Buttons(21)
Soft buttons
Scroll Button
Telephone Status Indicator
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Navigation Buttons
Dial Buttons
Microphone
Speaker Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Hold Button
Figure 1.4 DS-5021D/ITP-5021D Phone
Page 1-4
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
B Button
Programmable Buttons(14)
LCD Display
A Button
Soft buttons
Scroll
Telephone Status Indicator
Volume Buttons
Redial Button
Navigation Button
Dial Buttons
Microphone
Speaker Button
Hold Button
Conference Button
Transfer Button
Figure 1.5 DS-5014D/ITP-5014D Phone
The DS-5000D series phones have 38/21/14 programmable buttons that a station can
register any functions he/she wants to use. Also, there are several other function
buttons : the dial buttons, the volume button for controlling a voice volume, the redial
button that allows to redial the latest phone number, the conference button that can be
used during the conference, the transfer button that is used to transfer a call received
during a phone conversation to another station, the hold button to hold a call for a
while, the speaker button, and the navigation buttons that are designed for the
convenience of phone users.
And, there is the LCD display that displays the station status and various other kinds
of information. With three colors like red, green, and yellow, the station status
indicator displays the current status of station.
When MMC programming, other functions programmed on the programmable buttons
are as follows :
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Volume Button : Search the selected items.
Soft Buttons : Move the cursor
Speaker Button : Save data and proceed to the next program
Hold Button : Erase the previously entered item
A Button : Select either a capital letter or small letter
B Button : Select either a Korean character or English character
Transfer Button : Enter the programming code
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-5
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
3
Page 1-6
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Cautions in Programming
!
Programming can be done while the handset is placed on the phone at a idle
state.
!
Programming can be done on any phone.
!
Programming can be done only on the phone, not on normal phone.
!
If the phone does not have the LCD display, press the numbers using the dial
buttons as instructed by the programming guide, without using the volume
buttons. However, if the phone does not have Soft buttons, certain programming
cannot be done. Therefore, only the station level programming is allowed on the
phone that does not have the LCD display.
!
If the LCD displays an ‘INVALID DATA’ message while programming, this
means that the entered data is invalid. Enter the correct data again.
!
The content of the displayed message for each step shows the status after each
step is executed.
!
If no key is pressed for a certain period of time during programming
program end time, default is 60 seconds), it becomes a idle state from
programming mode.
!
If the phone is off hook while programming, it becomes a dial state from
programming mode.
!
Before the modified data is confirmed by pressing Left Soft button or Right Soft
button, the Speaker or Transfer button is pressed to make it at a idle state or the
phone is unplugged. In this case, the data entered up to that time will be
automatically saved as the data displayed on the LCD.
(Key
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
Program List
The MMC program can be divided into programmable one and non-programmable
one. The programmable MMC is classified into 3 levels, such as technician, operator,
and station level. In this section, the programmable MMC for each level will be
introduced.
4.1
Station Level Programming
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 100
Station Lock
MMC : 101
Change User Passcode
MMC : 102
Call Forward
MMC : 103
Set Answer Mode
MMC : 104
Station Name
MMC : 105
Station Speed Dial
MMC : 106
Station Speed Dial Name
MMC : 107
Key Extender
MMC : 108
Station Status
MMC : 109
Date Display
MMC : 110
Station On/Off
MMC : 111
Phone Ring Tone
MMC : 112
Alarm Reminder Clock
MMC : 113
View Memo Number
MMC : 114
Phone Volume
MMC : 115
Set Programmed Message
MMC : 116
Alarm And Message
MMC : 117
Edit Text Message
MMC : 118
Conference Group
MMC : 119
Caller ID Display
MMC : 121
Phone Language
MMC : 122
News Display Speed
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-7
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
4.2
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Operator Level Programming
4.2.1 System Related MMC
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 200
Open Customer Programming
MMC : 201
Change Customer Passcode
MMC : 202
Change Feature Passcode
MMC : 203
Assign UA Device
MMC : 204
Common Bell Control
MMC : 205
Assign Loud Bell
MMC : 206
Barge-In Type
MMC : 207
Assign VM/AA Port
MMC : 208
Assign Ring Type
MMC : 209
Assign Add-On Module
MMC : 210
Customer On/Off per Tenant
MMC : 211
Door Ring Assignment
MMC : 214
DISA Alarm Ringing Station
MMC : 217
Traffic Report Option
MMC : 219
Common Relay Service Type
MMC : 220
ISDN Service Type
4.2.2 Station Related MMC
MMC Program No
Page 1-8
Program Description
MMC : 300
Customer On/Off per Station
MMC : 301
Assign Station COS
MMC : 302
Pickup Groups
MMC : 303
Assign Boss/Secretary
MMC : 304
Assign Extension/Trunk Use
MMC : 305
Assign Forced Code
MMC : 306
Hot Line/Off Hook Selection
MMC : 308
Assign Background Music Source
MMC : 309
Assign Station MOH Source
MMC : 310
LCR Class Service
MMC : 312
Allow Caller ID
MMC : 314
Confirm Outgoing Call
MMC : 315
Customer Set Relocation
MMC : 316
Copy Station/Trunk Use
MMC : 317
Assign Station/Station Use
MMC : 318
Distinctive Ringing
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 319
Branch Group
MMC : 320
Preset Forward No Answer
MMC : 323
Calling Party Number
4.2.3 Trunk Related MMC
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 400
Customer On/Off per Trunk
MMC : 401
Trunk Line/PBX Line
MMC : 402
Trunk Dial Type
MMC : 403
Trunk Toll Class
MMC : 404
Trunk Name
MMC : 405
Trunk CO Tel Number
MMC : 406
Trunk Ring Assignment
MMC : 407
Forced Trunk Release
MMC : 408
Assign Trunk MOH Source
MMC : 409
Trunk Status Read
MMC : 410
Assign DISA Trunk
MMC : 414
PRS Signal
MMC : 415
Report Trunk Abandon Data
MMC : 418
BRI Card Restart
MMC : 419
BRI Options
MMC : 421
MSN Digit
MMC : 422
Trunk COS
MMC : 423
Station/Trunk Mode
MMC : 424
BRI S0 Mapping
MMC : 425
Assign Caller ID Trunks
MMC : 426
Trunk Gain Control
MMC : 428
Assign Trunk/Trunk Use
MMC : 434
Connection Status
MMC : 436
Trunk TMC Gain
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-9
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4.2.4 Timer and Tone Related MMC
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 500
System-Wide Counters
MMC : 501
System Timers
MMC : 502
Station-Wide Timers
MMC : 503
Trunk-Wide Timer
MMC : 504
Pulse Make/Break Ratio
MMC : 505
Assign Date And Time
MMC : 506
Tone Cadence
MMC : 507
Assign Ring Plan Time
MMC : 508
Call Cost
MMC : 510
SLI Ring Cadence
MMC : 512
Holiday Assignment
MMC : 514
Tone Source
MMC : 515
Assign Daylight Saving Date
4.2.5 Group Related MMC
MMC Program No
Page 1-10
Program Description
MMC : 600
Assign Operator Group
MMC : 601
Assign Station Group
MMC : 602
Station Group Name
MMC : 603
Assign Trunk Group
MMC : 604
Assign Station To Page Zone
MMC : 605
Assign External Page Zone
MMC : 606
Assign Speed Block
MMC : 608
Assign Review Block
MMC : 609
Call Log Block
MMC : 611
Allow Text Messaging
MMC : 612
Allow Group Conference
MMC : 614
Station/Trunk Use Group
MMC : 615
MGI Group
MMC : 616
MGI User
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
4.2.6 Tables, Codes and VM MMC
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 700
Copy COS Contents
MMC : 701
Assign COS Contents
MMC : 702
Toll Deny Table
MMC : 703
Toll Allowance Table
MMC : 704
Assign Wild Character
MMC : 705
Assign System Speed Dial
MMC : 706
System Speed Dial By Name
MMC : 707
Authorization Code
MMC : 708
Account Code
MMC : 709
Toll Pass Code/Special Code Table
MMC : 710
LCR Digit Table
MMC : 711
LCR Time Table
MMC : 712
LCR Route Table
MMC : 713
LCR Modify Digit Table
MMC : 714
DID Number And Name Translation
MMC : 715
Programmed Station Message
MMC : 716
UK LCR Options
MMC : 718
My Area Code
MMC : 720
Copy Key Programming
MMC : 721
Save Station Key Programming
MMC : 722
Station Key Programming
MMC : 723
System Key Programming
MMC : 724
Dial Numbering Plan
MMC : 725
SMDR Options
MMC : 726
VM/AA Options
MMC : 727
System Version Display
MMC : 728
CID Translation Table
MMC : 740
Station Pair
MMC : 750
VM System Restart
MMC : 751
Assign Mailbox
MMC : 752
Auto Record
MMC : 753
Warning Destination
MMC : 754
VM Halt
MMC : 755
VM Alarm
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-11
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
MMC Program No
4.3
Program Description
MMC : 756
Assign VM MOH
MMC : 757
VM In/Out
Technician Level Programming
MMC Program No
Page 1-12
Program Description
MMC : 800
Enable Technician Program
MMC : 801
Change Technician Passcode
MMC : 802
Customer Access MMC Number
MMC : 803
Assign Tenant Group
MMC : 805
Level And Gain
MMC : 807
Phone Volume Control
MMC : 809
System MMC Language
MMC : 811
Reset System
MMC : 812
Set Country Code
MMC : 815
Customer Database Copy
MMC : 816
Conference Gain
MMC : 818
Program Download
MMC : 820
Assign System Link ID
MMC : 822
Set Virtual Extension Type
MMC : 823
Assign Network COS
MMC : 824
Network Dial Translation
MMC : 825
Assign Networking Option
MMC : 829
LAN Printer Parameter
MMC : 830
Ethernet Parameters
MMC : 832
VoIP Access Code
MMC : 833
VoIP IP Table
MMC : 834
H.323 Options
MMC : 835
MGI DSP Options
MMC : 836
H.323 GK Options
MMC : 837
SIP Options
MMC : 840
IP Phone Information
MMC : 841
System IP Options
MMC : 845
WLAN Para
MMC : 846
WIP INFO
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
MMC Program No
Program Description
MMC : 847
WBS Reset
MMC : 848
WIP List
MMC : 849
WLAN Regist
MMC : 850
System Resource Display
MMC : 851
Alarm Reporting
MMC : 852
System Alarm Assignments
MMC : 853
Maintenance Busy
MMC : 856
Tech Programming Logs
MMC : 858
Assign System Emergency Alarm
MMC : 861
System Options
MMC : 890
Initialize Port
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 1-13
CHAPTER 1. Before Programming
5
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Overview of Programming Procedure
Here, the order of programming will be discussed before explaining programming
method of each list. Please read the description carefully before programming.
The programming order is as follows :
1) Make the programmable state.
! Press the Transfer button at pause.
! Enter the program number, either 200 or 800.
! Enter either the operator passcode or the technician passcode.
! Press 1 dial button to ‘enable’ the programming mode.
! In case of Program 800 Technician Program Mode Setting, enter the tenant
number to be programmed.
2) Make the program number selectable state.
If the Speaker button is pressed, the program selection mode appears.
Or, if the Transfer button is pressed, the programming state ends and the pause
state begin.
3) Select a program.
Enter the program number.
Or, select the program number with the Volume button and press the Speaker
button.
Or, Press Transfer button in a pause state and enter the program number.
4) Start programming the corresponding program.
Page 1-14
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CHAPTER 2
MMC Programming
In this chapter, how to use each program will be discussed according to each program
list.
First, you set the phone in the programmable state, then either set or change the value
according to the corresponding programming procedure. To set the phone in the
programmable state, see the ‘Overview of Programming Procedure’ of chapter1 in this
guide.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-1
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
100 Station Lock
Allows the system administrator or technician to lock or unlock an individual station
or all stations simultaneously. The three options are as follows :
No
Option
Description
0
UNLOCKED
Unlocks a locked station.
1
LOCKED OUT
The phone cannot make calls outside the system. It can however make
and receive intercom calls and receive incoming Trunk Line calls. When
in this mode the Hold button of the phone will flash slow RED.
2
LOCKED ALL
The phone cannot make or receive any calls. When in this mode the Hold
button of the phone will light steady RED.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 100
Display shows
[201] STN LOCK
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] STN LOCK
3. Enter 0 to unlock or 1 to lock(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] STN LOCK
UNLOCKED
UNLOCKED
[ALL] STN LOCK
?
LOCKED OUT
4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
Page 2-2
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS UNLOCKED
RELATED ITEMS
STATION USER PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-3
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
101 Change User Passcode
Allows the system administrator or technician to reset any phone’s passcode to its
default value of ‘1234’. This MMC cannot display station passcodes ; it can only
reset them to default.
Phone users can set or change their individual passcodes. The passcode is used to
lock or unlock the phone for toll restriction(call barring) override and to access the
DISA feature.
Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 101
Display shows
[201] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
2. Dial phone number(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor right
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:****
3. Press Hold button to reset passcode
[205] PASSCODE
PASSCODE:1234
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATION PASSCODES : 1234
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 100 STATION LOCK
Page 2-4
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
102 Call Forward
Allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other
station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has
been entered.
Allows several types of call forwarding : FORWARD ALL, FORWARD NO
ANSWER, FORWARD BUSY and FORARD DND. There is an additional option,
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to be activated
at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both.
0 : FORWARD CANCEL
1 : FORWARD ALL CALL
2 : FORWARD BUSY
3 : FORWARD NO ANSWER
4 : FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER
5 : FORWARD DND
All types forwarding can be set external number. In MMC 701 Class of Service, if
‘FORWARD’ is set ‘OFF’, you cannot set call forward but can cancel it. And if ‘EXT
FWD’ is set ‘OFF’, you cannot set external number.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 102
Display shows
[201] FORWARD
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] FORWARD
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
0:FORWARD CANCEL
0:FORWARD CANCEL
Page 2-5
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
3. Dial 0-* to select forward type
OR
Press Volume button to select forward type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] FORWARD
4. Dial destination number(e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select destination and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] FORWARD
5. Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO
OR
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] FORWARD
1:ALL CALL:NONE
1:ALL CALL:201
CURENTLY SET :YES
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 502 STATION TIMERS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Page 2-6
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
103 Set Answer Mode
Allows the system administrator to change the answer mode of any phone.
Each phone can have its answer mode set to one of the following options :
No
0
Answer Mode
RING MODE
Description
The phone will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns.
Calls are answered by pressing the ANS/RLS Button or by
lifting the handset.
1
AUTO ANSWER MODE
After giving a short attention tone, the phone will automatically
answer calls on the speakerphone. When a Trunk line is
transferred to a phone in Auto Answer, the screened portion of
the call will be Auto Answer, but the phone will ring when the
transfer is complete if you have not pressed the ANS/RLS
Button or lifted the handset.
2
VOICE ANNOUNCE
The phone will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can
MODE
make an announcement but the ANS/RLS Button or handset
must be used to answer calls.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 103
Display shows
[201] ANS MODE
2. Dial phone number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select phone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All
[205] ANS MODE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
RING MODE
RING MODE
[ALL] ANS MODE
?
Page 2-7
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
3. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change ring mode
OR
Press Volume button to select ring mode and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above
[205] ANS MODE
VOICE ANNOUNCE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL PHONES RING
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
Page 2-8
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
104 Station Name
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to
identify an individual station.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the
dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is ‘SAM SMITH’, press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now
press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the
table below to complete your message. Pressing A button will change the letter from
upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters : #, space, &, !, : , ?, ., ,, %, $, -,
<, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ", ",` , and \.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-9
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 104
Display shows
[201] STN NAME
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] STN NAME
3. Enter the station name using the procedure
described above and press Right Soft button to
return to step 2
[205] STN NAME
_
SAM SMITH
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-10
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
105 Station Speed Dial
Allows the system administrator or technician to program the personal speed dial
locations assigned to a station. This must be done for single line telephones because
these stations cannot access programming. Each station may have up to 50 locations
or bins assigned to it in MMC 606 Assign Speed Block. The speed dial bins are
numbered 00-49. Each speed dial number consists of a trunk or trunk group access
code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be dial. These dial digits may
consist of 0-9, * and #. If the system recognizes a valid trunk or trunk group access
number, it will automatically insert the separator.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
B
C
D
E
F
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
Used to mask/unmask following digits(shows as ‘[’ or ‘]’)
Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 106)
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 105
Display shows
[201] SPEED DIAL
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the
display will be as shown and a new station may
be selected
[205] SPEED DIAL
3. Dial location number(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select location and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] SPEED DIAL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
00:
00:
[205] SPEED DIAL
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
05:_
Page 2-11
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4. Enter trunk access code(e.g., 9) followed by the
number to be dialled(e.g., 4264100)
OR
Press the Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press the Left Soft button to return to step 3
Press HOLD button to clear an entry
If an error is made, use DOWN arrow to step
back
[205] SPEED DIAL
05:9-4264100_
5. Press ‘F’ button to access MMC 106 Station
Speed Dial Name
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 106 STATION SPEED DIAL NAME
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
Page 2-12
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
106 Station Speed Dial Name
Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when the directory dial
feature is used. The directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a
speed dial location by viewing its name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the
dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is ‘SAM SMITH, ’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now
press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the
table below to complete your message. Pressing A button will change the letter from
upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters : #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; , ", ",` , and \.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-13
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
A
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 106
Display shows
[201] SPEED NAME
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
If selected station has no speed dial bins, the
display will be as shown and a new station may
be selected
[205] SPEED NAME
3. Dial speed dial location(e.g., 01)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through location
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
cursor
[205] SPEED NAME
4. Enter the location name using the procedure
described above and press Right Soft button to
return to step 2
[205] SPEED NAME
00:
00:
[305] SPEED NAME
SPDBLK NOT EXIST
01:_
01:SAM SMITH
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
Page 2-14
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
107 Key Extender
Use this program to view the programmable buttons assigned to phone station.
In addition, it allows the system administrator to assign key extenders to some keys
that will make a general access feature key more specific. The feature keys that can
have extenders are listed below :
Feature
Extender
AB
Absence(extension number)
ACC
Account code bin(000-999)
BOSS
Boss and Secretary(1-4)
CR
VM Call Record
DIR
Directory dial by name type(1-3)
DP
Direct Pickup(extension or station group number)
DS
Direct Station Select(station number)
FWRD
Call Forward(0-7)
GPIK
Group Pickup(01-99)
IG
IN/Out of Group(station group number)
MMPG
Meet Me Page(0-9, * )
MW
Message Waiting(extension or station group number)
PAGE
Page(0-9, * )
PARK
Park Orbits(0-9)
RP
Ring Plan(1-6)
SG
Station Group(station group number)
PMSG
Programmed Station Messaging(01-20)
SPD
Speed Dial(00-49, 500-999)
VM
VM Memo(extension or station group number)
VT
Voice Transfer(VM group number)
When the Right Soft button will not move the cursor to the right, you are attempting to
add an extender to a key that cannot have one.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-15
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 107
Display shows first station
[201] EXT (MAST)
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through station
numbers and press Right Soft button to move the
cursor
[205] EXT (MAST)
3. Press the Right Soft button to
program the phone
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through the phone and
AOM’s and use the Right Soft button to move the
cursor
[201] EXT (MAST)
4. Enter key number(e.g., 18)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through keys and use
Right Soft button to move the cursor
OR
Press the key to be programmed
Dial extender according to above table.
System will return to this step. If no more entries,
press Left Soft button to return to step 2
[205] EXT (MAST)
01:CALL1"
01:CALL1"
01:CALL1"
[201] EXT (AOM1)
01:DS"
18:DS"
[205] EXT (MAST)
18:DS207"
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-16
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-17
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
108 Station Status
Displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a READ-ONLY MMC :
No
Station Port Attribute
Description
0
PORT #
Cabinet(1-3)/Slot(1-9)/Port(1-16)
1
TYPE
Phone Type
2
PICKUP GROUP
None, 01-99
3
SGR
Station Group Number
4
PAGE
None, Page Zone(0-4, * )
5
COS NO
COS(1-30) per Ring Plan(01-06)
6
TENANT GROUP
Tenant Group Number(1-2)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 108
Display shows first station
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
[201] STN STATUS
PORT NO:DLI-01
[205] STN STATUS
PORT NO:DLI-01
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
3.
4.
Page 2-18
Dial 0-9 to select station status type
OR
Press Volume button to select status and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] STN STATUS
PORT NO:DLI-01
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
PORT # : FOLLOWS HARDWARE POSITION
TYPE : DEPENDENT ON CONNECTED PHONE
PICKUP GRP : NONE
SGR : NONE
PAGE ZONE : NONE
COS NUMBER : 01 IN ALL RING PLANS
TENANT GRP : 1
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 302 PICKUP GROUPS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 604 ASSIGN STATION TO PAGE ZONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-19
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
109 Date Display
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the date and time display
mode on a per-station basis or system-wide.
No
0
1
2
Display Item
COUNTRY
CLOCK
DISPLAY
Description
Sets overall display format and has two options :
0=ORIENTAL
MM/DD DAY
HH:MM
1=WESTERN
DAY DD MON
HH:MM
Sets format of clock display and has two options :
0=12 HOUR
Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00
1=24 HOUR
Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00
Sets format of DAY and MON display and has two options :
0=UPPER CASE
Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR
1=LOWER CASE
Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 109
Display shows
[201] DAY FORMAT
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:WESTERN
COUNTRY:WESTERN
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all phones
3. Dial 0-2 to select mode
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through modes and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
Page 2-20
[ALL] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:?
[205] DAY FORMAT
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Press Volume button to scroll through formats
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
COUNTRY : WESTERN
CLOCK : 12 HOUR
DISPLAY : LOWER CASE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 ASSIGN DATE AND TIME
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-21
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
110 Station On/Off
Allows the system administrator to set any of the phone features listed below :
No
Features
00
AUTO HOLD
Default
OFF
Description
Automatically places an existing Trunk Line call on hold if a
CALL button, trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during
that call.
01
AUTO TIMER
ON
Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a Trunk
Line call.
02
HEADSET USE
OFF
When ON, this feature disables the hook switch allowing a
headset user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS/RLS
button.
03
HOT KEYPAD
ON
When ON, this feature allows you to dial directory numbers
without having to first lift the handset or press the Speaker
button.
04
KEY TONE
ON
Allows you to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on
phone.
05
PAGE REJOIN
ON
Allows you to hear the latter part of page announcements if
phone becomes free during a page.
06
RING PREF.
ON
When OFF, requires you to press the fast flashing button to
07
CALL COST
OFF
When ON, the cost of the call in progress will show in the
answer a ringing call after lifting the handset.
upper right corner of the phone display instead of duration
of the call.
08
AUTO CAMPON
OFF
09
AME BGM
OFF
When ON, phone users can allow intercom calls to camp-on
to other phones without having to press a CAMP-ON key.
This feature selects whether a station using Answer
Machine Emulation will hear their personal greeting or
BGM while callers are listening to the personal greeting.
A BGM source must be selected for this to work.
10
AME PASSCODE
OFF
When ON, station users who have AME set must enter
their station password to listen to messages being left.
11
DISP SPDNAME
OFF
When ON, the speed dial name associated with a speed
dial number is displayed on a phone equipped a LCD
display when using speed dial.
12
CID REVW ALL
ON
When ON, saves information on all calls that ring at an
extension, When OFF, saves information only on calls that
were not answered at the extension or by voice mail.
13
SECURE OHVA
ON
When ON, OHVA announcements will be heard on the
handset. When OFF, OHVA announcements will be heard
over the phone speaker.
Page 2-22
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
Features
14
NOT CONT.CID
ON
15
AUTO ANS CO
OFF
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Default
Description
When OFF, the Caller ID will be continue display after the
phone user answered call.
When On, the incoming CO call will be answered follows
phone answer mode.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 110
Display shows
[201] STN ON/OFF
2. Dial the option number from above list(e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select the option and press
the Right Soft button to move the cursor
[201] STN ON/OFF
3. Press Volume button to select ON or OFF
Press the Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
[201] STN ON/OFF
AUTO HOLD
HOT KEYPAD
HOT KEYPAD
:OFF
:OFF
:ON
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-23
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
111 Phone Ring Tone
Allows the system administrator or technician to select the ring tone heard at each
phone. There are eight ring tones available at each phone. A short tone burst of the
selection will be heard when the dial keypad is pressed.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 111
Display shows
[201] RING TONE
2. Dial phone number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All
[205] RING TONE
3. Dial 1-8 to select ring tone
OR
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] RING TONE
SELECTION
SELECTION
5
5
[ALL] RING TONE
SELECTION
SELECTION
?
5
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
FREQUENCY 5
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 114 PHONE VOLUME
Page 2-24
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
112 Alarm Reminder Clock
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm
clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. This must be done for single line
telephones, as they cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for each
station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a
DAILY alarm, as described below : The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled
after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. Alarm
numbers are 1, 2 and 3. In the case of Secondary Pair assignments(MMC 220) the
alarm only rings the station that is programmed and does not ring the paired station.
No
Alarm Mode
Description
0
NOTSET
No alarm
1
TODAY
Alarm only once
2
DAILY
Alarm daily at set time
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 112
Display shows
[201] ALM CLK(1)
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
[205] ALM CLK(1)
HHMM:"NOTSET
HHMM:"NOTSET
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button
3. Dial 1-3 to select alarm(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm and press
Right Soft button
[205] ALM CLK(1)
4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
[205] ALM CLK(2)
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
HHMM:"NOTSET
HHMM:1300"NOTSET
Page 2-25
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
5. Dial entry from above list for alarm type(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor and return
to step 2
[205] ALM CLK(2)
HHMM:1300"DAILY
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-26
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
113 View Memo Number
Allows a station user the ability to view a memo left by the user. A memo can be left
by entering it via the dial keypad using the table below : A memo of up to and
including 13 characters can be entered. For example, using the dial keypad, press ‘6’
once to enter the letter ‘M’, and press ‘3’ twice for an ‘E’. Pressing the A button will
change the letters from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; ,", ",` , and \.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-27
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 113
Display shows
[201] VIEW MEMO
2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor and add
memo via dial keypad using procedure above
[205] VIEW MEMO
1:
1:NEED BREAD
3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-28
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
114 Phone Volume
Allows the station user or system administrator to set the ring volume, off hook ring
volume, handset receive volume, speaker volume, background music volume and
page volume for any or all phones.
No
0
Item
RING VOL
Description
This is the volume setting for the phone ringer. There are eight
volume levels : level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the highest.
1
OFF-RING VOL
This is the volume of the alert tone that tells you there is a call
camped on to your phone. There are eight volume levels : level 1 is
the lowest and level 8 the highest.
2
HANDSET VOL
This is the volume setting for conversations on the handset receiver.
There are eight volume levels : level 1 is the lowest and level 8 the
highest.
3
SPEAKER VOL
This is the receive volume setting for conversations on the speaker
phone of a phone. There are 16 volume levels : level 1 is the lowest
and level 16 the highest.
4
BGM VOL
This is the volume you will hear background music over the phone
speaker at when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels : level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
5
PAGE VOL
This is the volume you will hear internal page over the phone
speaker when your phone is idle and BGM is turned on. There are
16 volume levels : level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 114
Display shows
[201] STN VOLUME
2. Dial phone number(e.g., 205)
[205] STN VOLUME
RING VOLUME :4
RING VOLUME :4
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-29
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Press Volume button to select volume type
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
[205] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL :13
4. Press Volume button to select volume
[205] STN VOLUME
SPEAKER VOL :08
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
RING VOLUME : 4
OFF-HOOK RING VOLUME : 4
HANDSET VOLUME : 4
SPEAKER VOLUME : 13
BGM VOLUME : 13
PAGE VOLUME : 13
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
Page 2-30
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
115 Set Programmed Message
Allows the system administrator to set a programmed message at any or all phones.
There are 20 messages available. The first ten are pre-programmed and the remaining
entries can be customized in MMC 715, Programmed Station Message. The last five
message are can be modified by each phone user.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 115
Display shows
[201] PGMMSG(00)
CANCEL PGM MSG
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All
[205] PGMMSG(00)
3. Dial an entry number to select message number
(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select message and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] PGMMSG(05)
PAGE ME
CANCEL PGM MSG
[ALL] PGMMSG(??)
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NO MESSAGES SELECTED
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 715 PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-31
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
116 Alarm And Message
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change the alarm
clock/appointment reminder feature for any station. This must be done for single line
telephones because they cannot access programming. Three alarms may be set for
each station and each alarm may be defined as a one-time or TODAY alarm or as a
DAILY alarm, as described below : The TODAY alarm is automatically cancelled
after it rings, while the DAILY alarm rings every day at the same time. It is also
possible to set a message to display when the alarm is sounded.
No
Alarm Mode
Description
0
NOTSET
No alarm
1
TODAY
Alarm only once
2
DAILY
Alarm daily at set time
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the
dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the message is
‘SAM SMITH, ’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the
number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table
below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable button will
change the letter from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
Page 2-32
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 116
Display shows
[201] ALM REM(1)
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] ALM REM(1)
3. Dial 1-3 to select alarm(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] ALM REM(2)
4. Enter alarm time in 24-hour clock format
(e.g., 1300 for 1pm)
Display will automatically advance to step 5
[205] ALM REM(2)
5. Dial valid entry from above list for alarm type
(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select alarm type and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] ALM REM
6. Enter messages using above table and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2
[205] ALM REM
HHMM:"NOTSET
HHMM:"NOTSET
[ALL] ALM REM(1)
HHMM:"NOTSET
HHMM:"NOTSET
HHMM:1300"NOTSET
HHMM:1300"DAILY
Sam SMITH
7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-33
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
ALARMS ARE NOTSET
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-34
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
117 Edit Text Message
Allows the system administrator or technician to set or change text message for any
station. One station can use up to 10 text messages.
In MMC 611 Text Message Station set USED station only uses this feature.
Messages are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing
the dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
message is ‘SAME TIME’, press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now
press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the
table below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable button
will change the letter from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-35
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 117
Display shows
[201] TXTMSG (01)
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] TXTMSG (01)
3. Dial 01-10 to select message
OR
Press Volume button to select message and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] TXTMSG (02)
4. Enter messages using above table and press Right
Soft button to return to step 3
[205] TXTMSG (02)
Blank Message
Blank Message
Blank Message
SAME TIME
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
BLANK MESSAGE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 611 TEXT MESSAGE STATION
Page 2-36
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
118 Conference Group
Allows the system administrator or technician to set one touch conference group
using GCONF key for any station. One station can use up to 6 conference groups,
and each group can be set 5 member.
In MMC 612 Conference Group Station set USED station only uses this feature.
On conference member, allows both internal station or station group number and
outgoing access code plus external telephone number.
Conference group names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a
character. Pressing the dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position.
For example, if the group name is ‘SAMSUNG’, press the number ‘7’ four times to
get the letter ‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue
selecting characters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the
bottom left programmable button will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ; ,", ",` , and \.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-37
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 118
Display shows
[201] GRP(1)NAME
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[203] GRP(1)NAME
3. Dial 1-5 to select group
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[203] GRP(1)NAME
4. Dial 0 to select name or dial 1-4 to select member
OR
Press Volume button to select name or member
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3
[203] GRP(1)MBR1
NONE
5. Enter conference member dial number and press
Right Soft button to return to step 4
[203] GRP(1)MBR1
9-2794296
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 612 CONFERENCE GROUP STATION
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Page 2-38
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
119 Caller ID Display
Allows the technician to set the individual station display preference on a per station
basis. Caller ID or CLI can be selected to either show the name, number first, or no
display depending on the type of call. Caller ID or CLI displays have the following
options :
No
Display Type
Description
0
NO DISPLAY
No Caller ID or CLIP data will be displayed.
1
NUMBER FIRST
The Caller ID or CLIP number received from the Central Office will
be displayed first.
2
NAME FIRST
The Caller ID or CLIP name received will be displayed first.
In the case of CLIP the number must be programmed in the CLIP
translation table(MMC 728). CLIP does not provide names.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 119
Display shows first station
[201] CID DISP
2. Enter station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through stations and
press the Right Soft button to select a station
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL and press
the Right Soft button.
[205] CID DISP
3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right or Left Soft button to return to step 2
[205] CID DISP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
NUMBER FIRST
NUMBER FIRST
[ALL] CID DISP
NUMBER FIRST
NAME FIRST
Page 2-39
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NUMBER FIRST
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CALLER ID
MMC 425 ASSIGN CID TRUNKS
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
MMC 728 CALLER ID TRANSLATION TABLE
Page 2-40
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
121 Phone Language
Allows phone users the ability to assign an LCD display based on user’s own
language.
0 : ENGLISH
1 : GERMAN
2 : PORTUGAL
3 : NORSK
4 : DANISH
5 : DUTCH
6 : ITALY
7 : SPANISH
8 : SWEDISH
9 : SPANISH/USA
10 : FRENCH/CANADA
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 121
Display shows
[201] LANGUAGE
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] LANGUAGE
3. Dial 00-10 for language required
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[205] LANGUAGE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
[ALL] LANGUAGE
?
GERMAN
Page 2-41
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH
RELATED ITEMS
MULTIPLE LANGUAGE
Page 2-42
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
122 News Display Speed
Used to set the Smart news display speed. This timer is only related to the Smart
News PC Application Package.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 122
Display shows first station
[201] CALL SPEED
2. Enter station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through stations
and press the Right Soft button to select a station
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL.
[205] CALL SPEED
3. Dial speed option(03-10).
[205] CALL SPEED
03"
03"
03"04
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
03
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-43
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
125 Executive State
Allows the system administrator or technician to set executive station’s the following
options.
No
0
Option
Description
EXEC STATE
When inter-working with EASYSET, the state of executive station
can be displayed.
1
STATE(IN)
If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS(IN), the EASYSET display this
2
STATE(OUT)
message.
If EXEC STATE sets to OTHERS(OUT), the EASYSET display this
message.
3
ANSWER MODE
When the secretary call by BOSS key, the executive station ringing
or automatically answer follows this option.
State display messages are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a
character. Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For
example, if the message is ‘CONFERENCE’, press the number ‘2’ three times to get
the letter ‘C’. Now press the number ‘6’ three times to get the letter ‘O’. Continue
selecting characters from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the
bottom left programmable button will change the letter from upper case to lower
case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
Page 2-44
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 125
Display shows
[201] EXEC STATE
2. Dial executive station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] EXEC STATE
3. Dial 0-3 for selects option
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[205] EXEC STATE
4. Dial 0-9 for selects state
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[205] EXEC STATE
IN THE ROOM
IN THE ROOM
IN THE ROOM
IN A MEETING
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-45
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
200 Open Customer Programming
Used to open(enable) and close(disable) customer-level programming.
If programming is not opened and an attempt is made to access a system MMC,
the error message [NOT PERMIT] will be displayed. A four digits passcode is
required to access this MMC. Each digit can be 0-9. When opened, this MMC
enables access to all MMCs allowed in MMC 802 Customer Access MMC Number.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
TRANSFER
Select open or closed
Used to enter passcode
Save data and advance to next MMC
Exit Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 200
Display shows
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
2. Enter passcode
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE:
PASSCODE:
Correct code shows
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
DISABLE
Incorrect code shows
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
PASSCODE ERROR
3. Press Volume button arrow key to select ENABLE
OR
DISABLE and press Right Soft button OR
Dial 1 for ENABLE or 0 for DISABLE
ENABLE CUS.PROG.
4. Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry
level and press Volume button to select MMC
OR
Enter MMC number and press Right Soft button
to enter MMC
201:CUS.PASSCODE
ENABLE
SELECT PROG. ID
5. Press Transfer button to exit
Page 2-46
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 201 CHANGE CUSTOMER PASSCODE
MMC 501 SYSTEM-WIDE TIMERS
MMC 802 CUSTOMER ACCESS MMC NUMBER
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-47
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
201 Change Customer Passcode
Used to change the passcode allowing access to MMC 200 Open Customer
Programming from its current value.
The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9. The current (old) passcode is
required for this MMC.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to enter passcodes
Save data and advance to next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 201
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
2. Enter new passcode via dial keypad
(maximum four digits)
CUST. PASSCODE
3. Verify new passcode via dial keypad
CUST. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:****
VERIFY
Passcode verified(go to step 4)
OR
Passcode failure
Return to step 2
:****
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY
:SUCCESS
CUST. PASSCODE
VERIFY
:FAILURE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
PASSCODE : 1234
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 200 OPEN CUSTOMER PROGRAMMING
Page 2-48
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
202 Change Feature Passcode
Used to change the passcodes for the following features.
No
Feature
0
RING PLAN
1
DISA ALARM
Description
This is the passcode required to place the system in different ring
plans(RP) or change the ring time override(RTO).
This is the passcode required to clear a DISA ALARM generated
when the number of DISA attempts are exceeded.
2
WLI REGST
This is the passcode required to registration of WIP phone.
The passcode is four digits long. Each digit can be 0-9.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to enter passcodes
Save data and advance to next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 202
Display shows
CHANGE PASSCODE
2. Press Volume button to make selection. Press
Right Soft button to move cursor to passcode entry
CHANGE PASSCODE
3. Enter new passcode via digits from dial keypad
CHANGE PASSCODE
RING PLAN :0000
DISA ALARM :5678
DISA ALARM :9999
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
Continue to change other passcodes
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-49
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN : 0000
DISA ALARM : 5678
ALARM CLR : 8765
WLI REGIST : 0000
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
MMC 507 ASSIGN AUTO NIGHT TIME
MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENTS
RING PLAN PROGRAMMING
Page 2-50
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
203 Assign UA Device
Assigns ringing device to be accessed when a Universal Answer(UA) key is pressed
or the UA pickup code is dialled. UA assignment is made in MMC 601 Assign
Station Group for a group and then the group is entered here. The device type is
automatically determined by the directory number(DN) entered.
Only one of the above options can be selected. If the ability to ring more than one
item(e.g., all four external page zones) is required, a station group containing all four
zone codes must be created.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter DN of selected device
Used to advance next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 203
Display shows current assignment
ASSIGN UA PORT
2. Dial DN of UA device(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume buttons to scroll through
available devices
ASSIGN UA PORT
NONE-NO UA
205 -STATION
3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
MMC 605 ASSIGN EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-51
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
204 Common Bell Control
Determines whether the common bell relay contacts have an interrupted or
continuous closure when activated. If interrupted is chosen, the relay follows an
internal Trunk Line ring pattern of one second closed followed by three seconds
open.
If assigned dry contact to common bell, common bell relay pairs are assigned as 362.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 204
Display shows current setting
[362]COM. BELL
2. Dial common bell number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of
common bell numbers and press Right Soft
button to advance cursor
[362]COM. BELL
3. Dial 0 for continuous or 1 for interrupted
operation
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[362]COM. BELL
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
INTERRUPTED
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
CONTINUOUS
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 219 COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE
Page 2-52
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-53
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
205 Assign Loud Bell
Designates the station that controls the loud bell ring output of a MISC module
(assigned in MMC 219, Common Relay Service Type). The loud bell will follow the
ring cadence of the designated station. Only a station can be assigned to control the
loud bell; a station group cannot be assigned.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Clears previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 205
Display shows current setting
[362]LOUD BELL
2. Dial loud bell number(e.g., 3902)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through loud bell
numbers and press Right Soft button to move the
cursor
[362]LOUD BELL
3. Enter station number(e.g., 201)
[362]LOUD BELL
RING PAIR:NONE
RING PAIR:NONE
RING PAIR:201
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
UNASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 219 COMMON RELAY SERVICE TYPE
Page 2-54
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
206 Barge-In Type
Sets the type of barge-in that is permitted.
No
0
Barge-in Type
NO BARGE-IN
Description
Barge-in feature is unavailable regardless of a station’s
barge-in status.
1
BARGE-IN WITH TONE
Barge-in will have an intrusion tone and display at the
barged-in on station.
2
BARGE-IN WITHOUT TONE
Barge-in is allowed. There is no barge-in tone or display at the
barged-in on station and the barging-in station will be muted.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 206
Display shows
BARGE IN TYPE
2. Dial 0-2 to select barge-in type(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select barge-in type and
press Right Soft button
BARGE IN TYPE
NO BARGE IN
WITHOUT TONE
3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NO BARGE-IN
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-55
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
207 Assign VM/AA Port
Enables SLI ports to be designated as NORMAL or VMAA. VMAA ports receive
digits designated in MMC 726 VM/AA Options and also receive a true disconnect
signal upon completion of a call. Only SLI ports, not key daughter board, support
disconnect signal. Do not make VMAA ports data; this will return them to a single
line port and stop voice mail integration. VMAA ports have the equivalent of data
protect written in the program and are protected against tones.
This MMC is not used to assign voice mail port. Voice mail port is assigned
automatically when the system detects a SVM-400.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 207 Display shows
[209] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] VMAA PORT
3. Dial 1 or 0 to select port type
(1=VMAA, 0=NORMAL)
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button
[205] VMAA PORT
NORMAL PORT
VMAA PORT
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-56
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL PORT
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
MMC 601 STATION GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-57
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
208 Assign Ring Type
Provides the flexibility to program single lines to have ICM ringing, Trunk Line
ringing and data secure. With the many types of external ringing devices, all
configurations can be met. All devices will also have a positive disconnect signal.
Do not make VM/AA ports data; this will return them to a single line port and stop
voice mail integration.
No
Ring Type
Description
0
ICM RING
Follows normal SLI ring cadence.
1
CO RING
Follows Trunk line ring cadence.
2
DATA RING
Follows Trunk line ring cadence and not supports off hook ring.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 208
Display shows
[209] RING TYPE
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] RING TYPE
3. Dial 1,2 or 0 to select port type(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Left or Right Soft button to return to step 2 above
[205] RING TYPE
ICM RING
ICM RING
DATA RING
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-58
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
ICM RING
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-59
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
209 Assign Add-On Module
Designates to which phone an add-on module(AOM) is assigned.
There is no limit to the number of AOMs that can be assigned in the system.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
RELEASE
Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Clears previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 209
Display shows first AOM
[301] AOM MASTER
2. Dial AOM number
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through AOM numbers
and use Soft buttons to move cursor
[301] AOM MASTER
3. Enter station number(e.g., 301)
OR
Use VOLUME for selection of stations and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[301] AOM MASTER
MASTER:NONE
MASTER:NONE
MASTER:201
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE FOR MASTER
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-60
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
210 Customer On/Off per Tenant
Allows the system administrator to set in system features on a per-tenant basis.
Each system option has a corresponding dialing number, as listed below : All options
toggle ON/OFF.
No
Option
00
DISA PSWD
Default
OFF
Description
When ON, a caller must enter extension number and DISA
password when they call a DISA trunk. When OFF,
extension number and DISA password are not required
and the caller has full access to all features allowed on this
trunk.
01
LCR ENABLE
OFF
This option determines whether the system will or will not
route outgoing calls based on the information in the LCR
routing tables
02
CID CODE INS
OFF
When ON, the system will insert the country code when
receiving CID information. This feature can use the CID
display call back feature.
03
DISA MOH
OFF
When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of
dial tone from the time the system answers a DISA trunk
until the caller dials a digit.
04
TRANSFER MOH
OFF
When ON, outside parties will hear trunk MOH instead of
ring back tone from the time a transfer is completed until
the call is answered by an internal party.
05
DID BSY ROUT
OFF
When ON, a DID call directed to a busy station will reroute to the destination in MMC 406 for that trunk if CW is
set to OFF in MMC 714. If the CW option is set to ON the
call will camp on. When OFF and the CW option is set to
OFF, the call will re-route to the operator.
06
RECALL PIKUP
OFF
When ON, a call recalling to a station can be picked up
using Direct Call Pickup, Pickup Group and My Group
features. This applies to held calls recalling and
transferred calls recalling to a station.
This applies to held calls recalling and transferred calls
recalling to a station.
07
ICM EXT FWD
OFF
When ON, call forward external is allowed when intercom
calls are placed to a station that has Call Forward External
programmed and set.
08
DID ERR TONE
OFF
This option was added to provide error tone when an
invalid DID number is received.
09
KTS DISC ALM
OFF
When ON, generates system alarm when a phone
disconnect or connect.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-61
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
No
Option
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Default
10
OFF HOOK ALM
OFF
11
SL SELF RING
OFF
Description
When ON, generates system alarm when a phone
maintains off hook condition longer than timer.
When ON, generates ring during 10 seconds when
a single line phone dials self number and hang up.
12
SGR INC BUSY
OFF
When ON, generates busy tone when all station
group member busy for group call.
13
TRANSFER CANCEL
OFF
When OFF, a single line phone will be able to
handle 2 calls simultaneously. Using the hook-flash
to toggle between them. When ON, a single line
telephone will be able to connect to the second call,
but pressing the hook flash will not toggle between
the two calls it will disconnect the second call and
reconnect the single line telephone to the first call.
14
RECALL DISC
OFF
When ON, the system disconnects a call when
transfer recall.
15
ARD TONE CHK
ON
When OFF, the system use time for checking
destination is busy when auto retry.
16
VPN ENABLE
OFF
17
IN TOLL CHK
OFF
When ON, the Australia type VPN enabled.
When OFF, the system doesn’t toll restrict when
incoming call.
18
ISDN PROGCON
OFF
When ON, if an outgoing call receives PROGRESS
message from ISDN trunk, the call will connect
without CONNECT message.
19
DSS KEY DPU
OFF
When ON, directed pick-up the call when press
ringing DS key.
20
BEGN DGT DSP
OFF
When ON, an outside call is made via speed dial or
LNR where more than 11 digits are dialled then the
first dialled digits are shown on the phone display.
21
ONE TCH FACC
OFF
When OFF, the forced account mode user can not
use one touch account code(ACC) key.
22
CHAIN FWD
ON
When ON, a call is directed to a station that may be
forwarded to another station that is call forwarded to
a VMAA, then the caller will be directed to the last
station’s mailbox it reached. When OFF, the caller
will be directed to the first station’s mailbox instead
of the last.
23
TRK MONITER
OFF
When ON, can override to trunk and a call is connected
override extension when a original caller hang on.
When OFF, can override to extension only and a call is
disconnected when a original caller hang on.
Page 2-62
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
24
Option
VOIP MFRALOC
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Default
OFF
Description
When ON, a MFR assigned for VoIP tandem call
when a call incoming from VoIP trunk to another
trunk outgoing.
25
NTWK AUTOTMR
OFF
When OFF, a call duration timer disabled via
networking intercom call.
26
USE EURO
OFF
When ON, a call cost display by euro currency.
27
REDIAL REVW
OFF
When ON, the CALL LOG review status will be
appeared when LNR button is pressed.
28
ISDN KEYFAC
OFF
When ON, if phone user press ‘*’ or ‘#’ during
conversation via BRI trunk, system send information
message instead of digit message.
29
CHK SPV TRK
OFF
When ON, if both trunks don’t have supervision
feature then cannot make outgoing transfer or
unsupervised conference.
30
PRE FWD BUSY
OFF
When ON, a call arrives busy station, that is not set
forward busy, if preset no answer destination is
available, a call re-route to that destination
immediately.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 210
Display shows
TEN. ON AND OFF
Dial option number(e.g., 00)
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
TEN. ON AND OFF
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
TEN. ON AND OFF
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
DISA PSWD
DISA PSWD
DISA PSWD
:OFF
:OFF
:ON
Page 2-63
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Repeat steps 2-3 for other options
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION/SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
MOH PROGRAMMING
CID PROGRAMMING
DID PROGRAMMING
VMAA PROGRAMMING
ALARM PROGRAMMING
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
Page 2-64
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
211 Door Ring Assignment
Designates which station or group of stations will ring when a door box button is
pressed. If the ring plan destinations are not input the default ring plan 1 is used.
Available Ring Plan inputs are 1 through 6.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Clears previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 211
Display shows first door phone
[229] DOOR RING
2. Dial door phone number(e.g., 230)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through door phone
numbers and use the Right Soft button to move
cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All door ring
[230] DOOR RING
3. Enter new ring plan number selection via dial
keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button
[250] DOOR RING
1:500
1:500
2:500
2:500
ALL] DOOR RING
1:500
1:301
2:500
2:500
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-65
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
STATION GROUP 500
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-66
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
214 DISA Alarm Ringing Station
Assigns the DISA alarm to ring at a specific phone. It is recommended that the
person who can clear the alarm also receives the notification. A valid destination can
be either a station group or an individual station. The alarm ringing station or group
will follow the ring plan time destination.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 214
Display shows
DISA ALARM RING
2. Enter in valid destination number for ring
plan(e.g., 217)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
DISA ALARM RING
3. Enter in valid destination number for another
ring plan(e.g., 249)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
DISA ALARM RING
1:500
1:217
1:217
2:500
2:500
2:249
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLAN : 500
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-67
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
217 Traffic Report Option
This MMC is used to print a traffic report and select options. The traffic report can be
printed upon demand, every hour, at a programmed time of each day, or up to three
separate timed shifts. Automatic printing will always clear the totals.
When report MANUAL PRINT OUT is selected, the options are :
Option
Description
PRINT AND CLEAR
A report is printed and all totals are reset to 0.
PRINTOUT ONLY
A report is printed and all the totals are saved.
CANCEL PRINTOUT
The program return to previous menu if no report is ended.
When AUTO PRINT OPTN is selected, the options are :
Option
Description
AUTO PRINT OFF
Automatic print feature is disabled.
DAILY
A report is printed at a programmable time every day and all the totals are
reset to ‘0’
EVERY HOUR
A Traffic report will be printed every hour
TIME SHIFTS
Up to three separate Start and End times may be programmed to report
traffic within certain times of a day. A report is printed at the end of each
End time and all totals are reset to ‘0’
When a report is printed, the totals represent call statistics accumulated from the date
of the last report stated as BEGINNING : D & T up to the date of this printout stated
as ENDING D & T. See the sample report at the end of this MMC.
If there are no trunks in a group, the trunk group report for that group will not print.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-68
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 217
Display shows
TRAFFIC REPORT
2. Dial 0 for demand or 1 for automatic print
OR
Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT
Soft button
TRAFFIC REPORT
3. Dial 0, 1, 2 or 3 for automatic print option
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button
TRAFFIC REPORT
4. Enter daily report time(HHMM)
TRAFFIC REPORT
MANUAL PRINTOUT
AUTO PRINT OPTN
DAILY
DAILY
HHMM:2359
HHMM:2200
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NO REPORT
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-69
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
219 Common Relay Service Type
This MMC is used to define the function of the common relay in the baseboard.
The relay can be used for one of the following:
0
1
2
3
EXTERNAL PAGE
COMMON BELL
LOUD BELL
NOT USE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 219
Display shows
[362] RELAY TYPE
2. Press Right Soft button to move the cursor
And
Use Volume button to scroll through options
[362] RELAY TYPE
EXTERNAL PAGE
COMMON BELL
[362] RELAY TYPE
LOUD BELL
3. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit .
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
[362] RELAY TYPE
COMMON BELL
DEFAULT DATA
EXTERNAL PAGE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 Assign UA Device
MMC 204 Common Bell Control
MMC 205 Assign loud bell
MMC 605 Assign External Page Zone
Page 2-70
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
220 ISDN Service Type
Assign the ISDN service type of single line telephone port. Service consist of BC
(Bearer Capability) and HLC(High Layer Capability).
No
Type
Description
BC
HLC
0
VOICE
Voice service
Speech
1
FAX 3
G3 FAX service
3.1 KHz Audio
FAX G2/G3
2
AUDIO 3.1
3.1 KHz Audio service
3.1 KHz Audio
None
3
MODEM
MODEM service
3.1 KHz Audio
Telephony
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 220
Display shows
[209] ISDN SVC
VOICE
2. Enter the station number(e.g., 210)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button
[210] ISDN SVC
3. Select service type(0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button
[210] ISDN SVC
AUDIO 3.1
VOICE
4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit .
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
VOICE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-71
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
300 Customer On/Off per Station
Allows the following features to be enabled on a per-station basis.
No
00
Option
ACCESS DIAL
Default
ON
Description
Determines whether a user can select a trunk or trunk
group by dialling its directory number(DN). This selection
should be turned to off when using LCR.
01
MICROPHONE
ON
Allows all 12 and 24 button phones to be used in the
speakerphone mode.
02
OFF-HOOK RING
ON
Will allow a short burst of ring tone to indicate another call.
03
SMDR PRINT
ON
When the station is set for no Trunk Line calls to and from
this station, the station will not print on SMDR.
This includes transferred calls or calls picked up from
hold or park.
04
TGR ADV.TONE
ON
When this feature is set to ON, a warning tone will be
heard each time LCR advances to the next route.
05
VMAA FORWARD
ON
This feature selects whether Trunk Line calls can be
forwarded to voice mail. When ON, Permits forward to
voice mail. When OFF, No forward to voice mail.
07
NGT PASSCODE
ON
When ON, the steps verifying the RING PLAN passcode
will be added in Ring Plan change.
08
INTRCOM SMDR
OFF
When the station is set to OFF, the station will not print
intercom calls on SMDR.
09
FWD DLY USE
OFF
When the station is set to ON, if the station has no
answer forward number without no answer forward set
then a call both ringing original extension and no answer
forward number when a incoming call is directed to the
station and the station does not answer until no answer
forward time.
11
FORWARD OVRD
OFF
When the station is set to ON, if the station call to
forwarded station, the call will not forward.
12
RECL TO OPER
OFF
When the station is set to ON, if the station transfer a call
and the destination doesn’t answer, the call will be recall
to operator instead of the station.
13
SLT PWR DISC
OFF
When the normal phone is set to ON, if the station
receives real disconnect signal instead of busy tone or
error tone. In case of VMAA ports or DATA RING ports
are not reference this option, this type SLI ports are
always receives real disconnect signal.
Page 2-72
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 300
Display shows
[201] CUS.ON/OFF
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
[205] CUS.ON/OFF
Press Volume button to select station
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all and press RIGHT
Soft button to move cursor
ACCESS DIAL :ON
ACCESS DIAL :ON
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
3. Press Volume button to select feature and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT
Soft button
[ALL] CUS.ON/OFF
ACCESS DIAL :ON
ACCESS DIAL :OFF
5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION/SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-73
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
301 Assign Station COS
Used to assign class of service to each phone. There are 30 different classes of
service that are defined in MMC 701, Assign COS Contents. There are 6 ring plans
based on the Ring Plan Time in MMC 507 that can apply to the COS. Classes of
service are numbered 01-30. Default is COS 01.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 301
Display shows first station
[201] STN COS
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations and
press Left Soft button to advance Step 4
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] STN COS
3. Enter new ring plan selection via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection OR
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] STN COS
4. Enter ring plan class of service(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance
the next ring plan.
[205] STN COS
Page 2-74
1:01
1:01
2:01
2:01
3:01
3:01
[ALL] STN COS
1:01
1:01
1:05
2:01
2:01
2:01
3:01
3:01
3:01
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to step 2
5. Enter the next ring plan class of service(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to move
cursor to the next ring plan.
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to
previous step.
[205] STN COS
1:05
2:01
3:01
6. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLANS 1-6 : 01
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 220 SECONDARY STATION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-75
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
302 Pickup Groups
Allows the assignment of stations into call pickup groups. There is a maximum of 10
pickup groups. An unlimited number of members can belong to each group. Stations
can only be in one pickup group at any given time.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 2-76
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 302
Display shows
[201] PICKUP GRP
Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to select station number and
press Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all
[205] PICKUP GRP
Dial pickup group number(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select group number
[205] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:NONE
PICKUP GRP:NONE
[ALL] PICKUP GRP
PICKUP GRP:??
PICKUP GRP:05
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 to
enter more stations
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NO PICKUP GROUPS ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-77
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
303 Assign Boss/Secretary
Assigns BOSS phones to SECRETARY phones. One BOSS station can have up to
and including four SECRETARY stations and one SECRETARY station can have up
to and including four BOSS stations. A dedicated BOSS button must be programmed
on the SECRETARY phone(s). A dedicated BOSS button must also be programmed
on the BOSS phone.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
F
Used to toggle BOSS/SECRETARY field
ACTION
PROCEDURE
Page 2-78
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 303
Display shows
BOSS STN:NONE
2. Dial BOSS station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button
BOSS STN:205
3. Dial SECRETARY number(1, 2, 3 or 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select number and press
Right Soft button
BOSS STN:205
4. Dial SECRETARY station number(e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select station
Press Right Soft button to return to step 3 to
enter more SECR numbers
BOSS STN:205
SECR 1:NONE
SECR 1:NONE
SECR 1:NONE
SECR 1:201
BOSS STN:205
SECR 2:202
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 and
continue entries
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-79
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
304 Assign Extension/Trunk Use
Allows trunk use groups on a per-station use group basis the ability to answer
incoming calls, to dial out or to do both. If a station is set to NO Dial, the station will
not have the ability to place a call. If the station is set to NO Answer, the station
cannot answer an incoming call.
Stations are set within the use group number 001-300 and trunks are within the use
group number 301-500 at MMC 614. ASSIGN USE GROUP.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
Page 2-80
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 304
Display shows
(001) USE (301)
2. Dial the station use group number(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select station use group
and press Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all station use
Group
(005) USE (301)
3. Dial the station use group number(e.g., 304)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk use group
and press Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunk use
group
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
(005) USE (ALL)
DIAL:YES ANS:YES
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Press Volume button to select YES/NO option
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT
Soft button to move cursor to ANS option
(005) USE (304)
Press Volume button to select YES/NO Option
OR
Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press RIGHT
Soft button to return to step 2
(005) USE (304)
DIAL:NO
DIAL:NO
ANS:YES
ANS:YES
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL : YES
ANS : YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 316 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-81
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
305 Assign Forced Code
This MMC allows only one of the four options to be selected; the assignment of
account code with verification, account code without verification, authorization
codes, or none on a per-station basis or on an all-station basis. The system supports
100 authorization codes. The system supports 200 account codes that are verified
when account codes verified is selected. If account codes without verification is
selected, then there will be no table used.
No
0
Code Type
NONE
Description
No Account or Authorization code required
(NOT forced strictly voluntary).
1
AUTHORIZE CODE
Forces user to enter a valid over four digit Authorization code listed
in AUTHORIZATION CODE Table(MMC 707).
2
ACCT VERIFIED
3
ACCT NO VERIFIED
Forces user to enter a valid account code listed in ACCOUNT
CODE Table(MMC 708).
Forces user to enter an account code but this code is NOT
verified. User can make up any code
(any account code up to 12 digits including ∗ and #).
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
Page 2-82
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 305
Display shows
[201] FORCD CODE
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] FORCD CODE
3. Dial a feature option 0-3(e.g., 2)
OR
[205] FORCD CODE
NONE
NONE
ACCT VERIFIED
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return step 2
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 707 AUTHORIZATION CODE
MMC 708 ACCOUNT CODE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-83
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
306 Hot Line/Off Hook Selection
Allows a station the ability to make a predetermined call similar to a ring down
circuit, upon the expiration of a timer(see MMC 502 STN TIMERS, Off-Hook
Selection Timer). The hotline destination can be a station, a station group, a trunk, a
trunk group or an external number. There can be a maximum of 18 digits in the dial
string for the external number. The access code for the trunk or trunk group access
code is not counted as part of the 18.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
B
Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E
Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘ [’ or ‘] ’
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 306
Display shows
[201] HOT LINE
NONE
2. Dial station number
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through stations
Press Right Soft button to move the cursor
[205] HOT LINE
NONE
3. Enter the hot line destination i.e., a station or
trunk ID(e.g., 9 or 701) with a maximum of
18 outgoing digits
after the access code for the CO call
(see above list of options if needed)
[205] HOT LINE
9-1305P4264100_
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 502 STN TIMERS, OFF-HOOK SELECTION TIMER
Page 2-84
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
308 Assign Background Music Source
Assigns a background music source to the phones. One music source is in the system
and the telephone number is 371. The number 371 can be used both for an internal
and an external music source. If ‘NONE’ is selected as a background music source,
or if a music source is not connected to the external music source port selected as the
background music source, no music will be heard.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 308
Display shows current setting
[201] BGM SOURCE
2. Dial phone number(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] BGM SOURCE
3. Enter source number(e.g., 371)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
BGM SOURCE:NONE
[ALL] BGM SOURCE
BGM SOURCE:?
BGM SOURCE:371
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-85
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 309 ASSIGN STATION MOH SOURCE
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MOH SOURCE
Page 2-86
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
309 Assign Station MOH Source
Assigns a Music on Hold source to the phones. Allows the system administrator to
select which Music On Hold(MOH) source can be heard on each station. There are
four possible selections for each music sources : TONE, NONE, INTERNAL and
EXTERNAL(customer-provided MOH source and switch select internal/external).
There is a music source selection jumper on the baseboard(switch select
internal/external). The default directory number on a background music source is
371.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 309
Display shows current setting
[201] STN MOH
2. Dial phone number(e.g., 205)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through phone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move the
cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] STN MOH
3. Enter source number(e.g., 371)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
[205] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:NONE
MOH SOURCE:NONE
[ALL] STN MOH
MOH SOURCE:?
MOH SOURCE:371
4. OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-87
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 308 ASSIGN BACKGROUND MUSIC SOURCE
Page 2-88
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
310 LCR Class Of Service
Assigns the LCR class of service allowed on a per-station basis. There are eight
classes which may be assigned. LCR class of service allows specific users to trunk
advance up to a matching LCR class of service programmed in MMC 712.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 310
Display shows
[201] LCR CLASS
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select All stations
[205] LCR CLASS
3. Dial 1-8 to select class type(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select class type and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS 1
LCR CLASS 1
[ALL] LCR CLASS
LCR CLASS ?
LCR CLASS 3
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
LEAST COST ROUTING COS : 1
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-89
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
312 Allow Caller ID
Allows the system administrator or technician to allow or deny CID data to be send
or displayed at with LCD phones.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
ANS/RLS
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to clear previous entry
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 312
Display shows
[201] CID/ANI
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[205] CID/ANI
3. Dial 0 or 1 to select receive option
OR
Press Volume button to select receive option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] CID/ANI
4. Dial 0 or 1 to select send option
OR
Press Volume button to select send option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
[205] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
RCV:YES SND:YES
[ALL] CID/ANI
RCV:YES SND:YES
RCV:YES SND:YES
RCV:YES SND:YES
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
Page 2-90
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
RCV : YES
SND : YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 119 CALLER ID DISPLAY
MMC 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-91
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
314 Confirm Outgoing Call
Allows the outgoing call restricted by call duration time, disconnect or confirm with
tone.
No
Confirm Type
Description
0
NONE
No action
1
CONFIRM TONE
When a Trunk Line confirm tone time expire, a call user heard system
confirmation tone and next a Trunk Line confirm tone time started.
2
DISCONNECT
When a Trunk Line confirm tone time expire, a call is disconnected.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 314
Display shows
[201] CO CONFIRM
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] CO CONFIRM
3. Dial a feature option 0-2
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] CO CONFIRM
NONE
NONE
[ALL] CO CONFIRM
NONE
CONFIRM TONE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
Page 2-92
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM WIDE TIMER
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-93
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
315 Customer Set Relocation
Customer Set Relocation allows System Administration level or Technician level
access to relocate or exchange similar stations in the system without wiring changes
(see Allow Table bellow). This program is a one for one exchange with like stations.
e.g., Single line to single line, 6 button phone to 6 button phone, etc.
All individual station assignments such as trunk ring, station group, station COS,
station speed dial, button appearances, etc. will follow the Customer Set Relocation
program. 12 button phones and 24 button phones can be exchanged. 48 button
modules and 64 button modules can also be exchanged. Single line stations numbers
can be exchanged. If incompatible set types are selected the system will provide an
ERROR : NO MATCH message. If 48 or 64 button module units are to be exchanged
the Master assignment must be removed prior to using Customer Set relocation.
If the 48 or 64 button module Master station is not removed the error code ERROR :
NOT ALONE will appear on the LCD display. A station must be in the idle state(on
hook) to perform Customer Set Relocation. If a wired location has a station port
connected but no telephone instrument the Customer Set Relocation program will
allow set relocation as long as the station types are similar.
12 button and 24 button assignments should be taken in consideration when
relocating these types of sets due to the button configurations of the instruments.
If a 12 button set and a 24 button set are exchanged using the Customer Set
Relocation program the first twelve buttons on the 24 button set will have the button
programming of the 12 button set. The 12 button set will then have the programming
of the first twelve buttons of the 24 button set. In other words, when exchanging 12
and 24 button set only the first twelve buttons will swapped.
Customer access to this feature is default OFF in MMC 802.
Page 2-94
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Customer set relocation allow table is as follows :
S/L
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
DS-
IP-
IP-
6B
12B
24B
48B
64B
28B
18B
8B
21D
14D
21D
14D
S/L
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DS-6B
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DS-12B
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DS-24B
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DS-48B
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DS-64B
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
DS-28B
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
DS-18B
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
DS-8B
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
DS-21D
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
DS-14D
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
N
IP-21D
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
IP-14D
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 315
Display shows
SET RELOCATION
EXT_
EXT
2. Enter first station number(e.g., 202)
press Right Soft button to move cursor
SET RELOCATION
EXT202 EXT_
3. Enter second station number(e.g., 210)
Press Right Soft button to enter data
SET RELOCATE
EXT202 EXT210
4. Display will return to step1
Go to step 2
SET RELOCATION
EXT_
EXT
5. Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-95
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-96
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
316 Copy Station/Trunk Use
Provides a tool for duplicating station/trunk use assignments in MMC 304 from one
station user group to another. This can be done on a per-station use group basis or on
all station use groups.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 316
Display shows
(001] CPY USABLE
2. Enter station use group number(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
(005] CPY USABLE
3. Enter station use group number to copy from
Cursor is returned to step 2
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
(005) CPY USABLE
FROM:NONE
FROM:NONE
FROM:003
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-97
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
317 Assign Station/Station Use
This MMC is used to allow or restrict stations from making intercom calls to each
other within the same tenant.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 317
Display shows
(001) USE (001)
2. Dial the station use group number(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all station use
groups
(005) USE (001)
3. Dial the station use group number(e.g., 004)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button
(005) USE (004)
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
(005) USE (004)
DIAL:YES
DIAL:YES
(ALL) USE (001)
DIAL:YES
DIAL:YES
DIAL:NO
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-98
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL : YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 316 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-99
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
318 Distinctive Ringing
Allows the technician to select the ring tone heard at a phone when called by a
specific station or when a specific trunk rings that phone. There is also a cadence
control option to perform a similar function for single line sets. There are eight ring
tones available along with a Follow Station(F-STN) option for the phones. There are
5 cadences and a follow station option for SLT’s.
TONE OPTION
Tone Option
F-STN
Description
Calls will ring with the phone users choice of ring frequency.
1-8
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring phones with this ring
frequency.
CADENCE OPTION
Cadence Option
F-STN
Description
Calls will ring with the normal SLT ring cadences.
1
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the intercom ring
2
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the CO ring
cadence.
cadence.
3
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the DOOR ring
cadence.
4
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the ALARM ring
cadence.
5
Calls from the programmed station or trunk will ring SLT’s with the CALLBACK ring
cadence.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-100
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 318
Display shows first station
[201] RING TONE
2. Dial trunk or station number(e.g., 701)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk or station
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
[701] RING TONE
3. Dial 1-8 to select ring tone
OR
Press Volume button to select ring tone and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[701] RING TONE
4. Dial 1-5 to select ring cadence
OR
Press Volume button to select ring cadence and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[701] RING TONE
T:F-STN C:F-STN
T:F-STN C:F-STN
T:5
T:5
C:F-STN
C:3
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
F-STN FOLLOW STATION SETTING
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 111 PHONE RING TONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-101
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
319 Branch Group
Allows the assignment of stations into branch groups. There is a maximum of 30
branch groups. When C.O. line ring is ringing at station assigned the same branch
group can answer the incoming call by off hook.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 319 Display
shows
[201] BRANCH GRP
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and use
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] BRANCH GRP
3. Dial a branch group number(01-99)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:NONE
BRANCH GRP:NONE
[ALL] BRANCH GRP
BRANCH GRP:??
BRANCH GRP:10
4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-102
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
320 Preset Forward No Answer
Allows a technician to assign a default destination for FNA to each station on the
system. These destinations may be different for each station or they may be the same.
The preset FNA destination will be temporarily overwritten if the station user enters a
different FNA destination. If you cancel the new destination, the preset destination
will once more be in effect. Preset Forward No Answer time follows the station no
answer forward timer.
Preset forward no answer can be assigned respectively for each type of call.
No
Call Type
Description
0
INT
Preset forward no answer applies only to intercom call.
1
EXT
Preset forward no answer applies only to incoming call.
2
BOTH
Preset forward no answer applies to both intercom and incoming call.
If MMC 210. PRE FWD BUSY sets ON, the forward busy follows this feature.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 320
Display shows
[201] PRESET FNA
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations
[205] PRESET FNA
3. Dial valid number via keypad
OR
[205] PRESET FNA
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
NONE
NONE
OPT:BOTH
OPT:BOTH
[ALL] PRESET FNA
NONE
202
OPT:BOTH
OPT:BOTH
Page 2-103
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Press Volume button to select call type and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
4. Dial call type (0, 1 or 2)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] PRESET FNA
202
OPT:EXT
5. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 FORWARDING
MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC 502 STATION FWD NO ANS TIMER
Page 2-104
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
323 Calling Party Number
Allows a maximum 16 digits number to be entered and associated with a station or
trunk number on a per PRI/BRI basis. When this station makes an outgoing call on
this PRI, the maximum 16 digits number entered will be the Calling Party Number
sent on this outgoing PRI call. There are 4 tables for system.
In case of empty, system use MMC 405 : CO TRUNK NUMBER for the Calling
Party Number.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options/move cursor left or right
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 323
Display shows
[201] SEND CLIP
2. Dial extension or trunk number(e.g., 230)
OR
Press Volume button to select extension and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor
[230] SEND CLIP
3. Dial table number.
OR
Press Volume button to select table number and
press Right Soft button to move the cursor
[230] SEND CLIP
4. Enter the Calling Party Number.
[230] SEND CLIP
1:
1:
2:
2:3055922900
5. Repeat Step 3 & 4 to enter other tables and
Calling Party Numbers.
OR
Repeat Steps 2, 3, & 4 to enter other station or
trunk and Calling Party Numbers.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-105
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
EMPTY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 834 VOIP H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 VOIP SIP OPTIONS
Page 2-106
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
400 Customer On/Off per Trunk
Assigns several options(listed below) on a per-trunk basis.
No
0
Options
1A2 EMULATION
Default
OFF
Description
When this option is set to ON up to 4 internal stations
can participate in a conversation on this trunk by
pressing the trunk key.
1
TRUNK INC DND
OFF
When this option is set to ON a trunk that is programmed
to ring a specific station(a private line or DIL) will ring at
that station if the station is in DND.
2
TRUNK FORWARD
ON
When this option is set to OFF this trunk will not follow a
ringing stations call forwarding.
2
LCR ALLOW
OFF
When this option is set to ON, if the station access this
trunk will re-route via LCR outgoing. This feature
available in Australia, New Zealand, Italy and U.K. only
4
MOH/BGM USE
OFF
When this option is set to ON, this trunk uses MOH
source. This feature available Australia’s 8TRK/7TRK only.
6
EFWD EXT CLI
ON
This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the external forwarded outgoing call.
(Station or Received CLI from Trunk)
7
REPEAT CLI
ON
This option determines what kinds of CLI number will be
sent to the trunk to trunk call.
(Trunk or Received CLI from Trunk)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-107
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 400
Display show
[701] TRK ON/OFF
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for all trunks and press
Right Soft button to move cursor to options
[704] TRK ON/OFF
3. Dial option number from above list(0-4)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[704] TRK ON/OFF
4. Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF
OR
Press Volume button to select ON/OFF and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[704] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
1A2 EMULATE:OFF
[ALL] TRK ON/OFF
1A2 EMULATE:?
TRK FORWARD:ON
TRK FORWARD:OFF
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
LCR PROGRAMMING
CALL FORWARD
Page 2-108
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
401 Trunk Line/PBX Line
Used to select the mode of the Trunk line. If the PBX mode is chosen, this allows
PBX access codes to be recognized, thus allowing more complete toll restriction(call
barring). This mode is assigned on a per-trunk basis.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 401
Display shows
[701] PBX LINE
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[704] PBX LINE
3. Dial 1 for PBX or 0 for Trunk Line
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[704] PBX LINE
CO LINE
CO LINE
[ALL] PBX LINE
?
PBX LINE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNK LINES
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-109
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
402 Trunk Dial Type
Used to determine the dialling type of each Trunk line. There are three options :
0 : Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF).
1 : DIAL PULSE(rotary dial)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 402
Display shows
[701] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk
numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[704] DIAL TYPE
DTMF TYPE
3. Dial 0 for DTMF, 1 for PULSE or 2 for
R2MFC TYPE
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through options
Press Right Soft buttons to return to step 2
[704] DIAL TYPE
DIAL PULSE TYPE
[ALL] DIAL TYPE
?
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS DTMF
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMERS
Page 2-110
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
403 Trunk Toll Class
Assigns toll class level assignments on a per-trunk or all-trunk basis in a day or night
condition. The options for toll level will follow either the station class or the class of
service defined in MMCs 702, Toll Deny Table, and 703, Toll Allowance Table.
The toll classes that are available are listed below with their entry numbers.
No
Class
Description
0
F-STN
Follow station toll restriction
1
CLS-A
Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)
2
CLS-B
Follow toll class B
3
CLS-C
Follow toll class C
4
CLS-D
Follow toll class D
5
CLS-E
Follow toll class E
6
CLS-F
Follow toll class F
7
CLS-G
Follow toll class G
8
CLS-H
Follow toll class H(All restricted)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 403
Display shows
[701] TOLL CLASS
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[704] TOLL CLASS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
[ALL] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F_STN
Page 2-111
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
3. Dial ring plan number(1-6)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through ring plan
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
the cursor
[704] TOLL CLASS
4. Enter day toll class (e.g., 2 for CLS-B)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through toll classes and
use Right Soft button to move the cursor
[704] TOLL CLASS
1:F-STN 2:F-STN
1:CLS-B 2:F-STN
5. Press Transfer button and enter to store data and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS F-STN
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 507 ASSIGN AUTO RING PLAN TIME
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
TOLL RESTRICTION
Page 2-112
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
404 Trunk Name
Allows an 11-character name to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the
dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is ‘SAM SMITH, ’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now
press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the
table below to complete your message. Pressing A button will change the letter from
upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-113
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 404
Display shows
[701] TRUNK NAME
2. Dial trunk(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor
[704] TRUNK NAME
3. Enter trunk name using the procedure
described above Press Right Soft button to
return to step 2
[704] TRUNK NAME
TELECOMS
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104 STATION NAME
MMC 405 TRUNK NUMBER
Page 2-114
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
405 Trunk C.O. Telephone Number
Allows an 11-digit number to be entered to identify an individual trunk.
Numbers are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a digit. Pressing
the desired key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
number is 426-4100, press the number 4 once to get the number 4. Now press the
number 2 once for number 2. Continue selecting characters from the table below to
complete your number.
When the number you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
number, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume
Down button to move the cursor left. A space can be entered by using these keys.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
0
<
>
.
)
DIAL 1
1
Space
?
,
!
DIAL 2
2
A
B
C
@
DIAL 3
3
D
E
F
#
DIAL 4
4
G
H
I
$
DIAL 5
5
J
K
L
%
DIAL 6
6
M
N
O
^
DIAL 7
7
P
Q
R
S
DIAL 8
8
T
U
V
*
DIAL 9
9
W
X
Y
Z
DIAL *
*
:
=
[
]
The # button can be used for special characters : #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -, <, >, /,
=, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options/move cursor left or right
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-115
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 405
Display shows
[701] CO TEL NO.
2. Dial trunk(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move the cursor
[704] CO TEL NO.
3. Enter trunk number using the procedure
described above
[704] CO TEL NO.
3054264100
4. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
Page 2-116
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
406 Trunk Ring Assignment
Enables ringing to a specific station or to a group of stations when incoming calls are
received. This MMC controls ring plan destinations for ring down trunks. If the ring
plan destinations are not input the default ring plan is ring plan 1. Station group 500
is default in Ring Plan 1.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL(trunks only)
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 406
Display shows
[701] TRK RING
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk
numbers and press the Right Soft button to move
the cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for ALL
[704] TRK RING
3. Dial ring plan number or press the Right Soft
button to move the next step.
[704] TRK RING
4. Dial station number or station group number
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to the
next ring plan destination and repeat step 5
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 5
OR
[704] TRK RING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
1:500
1:500
2:500
2:500
[All] TRK RING
1:500
1:500
1:205
2:500
2:500
2:500
[704] TRK RING
1:205
2:501
Page 2-117
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS RING DEFAULT OPERATOR GROUP
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 CHANGE FEATURE PASSCODES
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Page 2-118
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
407 Forced Trunk Release
Provides a positive forced trunk release to a specific trunk or all trunks in the event of
a trunk lock-up.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 407
Display shows
[701] TRK RELS.
2. Dial in trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button selected trunk and press
Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks
[704] TRK RELS.
3. Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO
(Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2)
[704] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
[ALL] TRK RELS.
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
RELEASE?_Y:1,N:0
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-119
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
408 Assign Trunk MOH Source
Allows the system administrator to select which Music On Hold (MOH) source can
be heard on each trunk. There are three selections: TONE, NONE and one of the
customer-provided MOH sources connected to the system. The default directory
number of the MOH source is 371.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 408
Display shows current setting
[701] TRK MOH
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 702)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunk numbers
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[702] TRK MOH
3. Enter source number(e.g., 371)
OR
Press Volume button to select option
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above
[703] TRK MOH
MOH SOURCE:TONE
MOH SOURCE:TONE
[ALL] TRK MOH
MOH SOURCE:?
MOH SOURCE:371
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-120
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
409 Trunk Status Read
Allows the status of trunks to be read in a format that will enable the servicing
personnel to quickly identify the ownership and position of a trunk. This is a readonly MMC.
Trunk Status Type No
Description
00
Port Number(Cabinet/Slot/Port)
01
Type : LOOP, GND, E & M, DID, BRI, PRI, VOIP…
02
1A2 Emulation On/Off
03
Trunk Forward On/Off
04
Line Type : CO/PBX
05
Dial Type : DTMF/Dial Pulse
06-11
Ring Plan Toll Restriction(1-6)
12-17
Ring Plan Ring Destination(1-6)
18
MOH Source
19
DISA Status
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 409
Display shows
[701] TRK STATUS
2. Enter trunk number via dial keypad(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor
[704] TRK STATUS
3. Enter in desired option 00-12(e.g., 02)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
[704] TRK STATUS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
PORT:C1-S5-P01
PORT:C1-S5-P04
TYPE:LOOP TRUNK
Page 2-121
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW TRUNK
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 401 Trunk Line/PBX LINE
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
MMC 403 TRUNK TOLL CLASS
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 408 ASSIGN TRUNK MUSIC ON HOLD SOURCE
MMC 410 ASSIGN DISA TRUNK
Page 2-122
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
410 Assign DISA Trunk
Allows the system the ability to have Direct Inward System Access(DISA).
Because there is a possibility that unauthorized calls will be made via this feature,
several safeguards have been added. The end user must be informed of these to
prevent unnecessary service calls. DISA can lockout when a predetermined number
of invalid consecutive calls are attempted.
Callers will then receive error tone until the programmable timer has expired.
The * key may be used to initiate new dial tone while in a station to station call.
The # button may be used to terminate the DISA call and disconnect the central
office line. DISA lines must be assigned to the Ring Plan(s).
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL(trunks)
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 410
Display shows
[701]
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks
OR
[704]
3. Press VOL key Volume button to select a
Ring Plan.
OR
Using the dial keypad press 1 to apply and 0 not
to apply to a particular Ring Plan and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2
[704]
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
123456
DISA LINE:000000
123456
DISA LINE:000000
[ALL]
123456
DISA LINE:000000
123456
DISA LINE:001000
Page 2-123
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS NORMAL
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 500 SYSTEM-WIDE COUNTERS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS
Page 2-124
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
414 PRS Signal
Used on a per-trunk basis to define if a Trunk line is to be either a Metering Pulse
Detection(MPD) or a Polarity Reversal Signal(PRS) trunk.
A Metering Pulse Trunk will detect a C.O provided metering pulse. A Polarity
Reversal trunk will detect the line reversal signal which may be provided by the
Trunk Line When the other party answers the outgoing call or the outside party clears
the call.
If the trunk is designated as PRS detection, the call duration timer will be started and
the results printed on the SMDR record. PRS detection is also essential for dropping
a trunk-to- trunk conversation which is unsupervised by an internal party.
There are three types of PRS mode : PRS 1, PRS 2 and PRS 3.
PRS Mode
PRS 1
Description
When first PRS is detected, call duration is started. When second PRS is detected,
call duration timer stopped. The call is not released until hanging-on.
PRS 2
When first PRS is detected, call duration timer is started. When second PRS is
detected, call duration timer is stopped and call is released.
PRS 3
The call duration timer starts based on the timer. When first PRS is detected, call
duration timer is stopped and call is released.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 414
Display shows
[701] TRK PRS
2. Dial desired trunk number(e.g., 702)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and use Right
Soft button to move cursor
[702] TRK PRS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
NONE
NONE
Page 2-125
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
3. Dial 0 for PRS 1, 1 for PRS 2, 2 for PRS 3 or 3
for MPD or 4 for NORMAL
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through options
and use LEFT or Right Soft button to return to
step 2
[702] TRK PRS
PRS 2
4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL(NONE)
RELATED ITEMS
MMC503 TRUNK-WIDE TIMER
Page 2-126
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
415 Report Trunk Abandon Data
Allows the system administrator or technician to enable or disable the reporting of
abandoned Trunk Line calls for which CID, CLIP information has been collected on
a per-trunk basis. There are two options for this MMC as follows :
No
0
Report Type
REPORT : NO
Description
Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will not
be printed on SMDR or stored in the system call abandon list. These
records will continue to be stored in the station review list.
1
REPORT : YES
Abandoned call records for incoming calls with CID information will be
printed on SMDR and stored in the system call abandon list.
These records will also be stored in the station review list.
In order for these abandoned call records to print on SMDR, MMC 725 SMDR
OPTIONS Option 11 Print Abandoned Call Records must be set to YES.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 415
Display shows
[701] TRK ABNDN
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 702)
OR
Use Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[702] TRK ABNDN
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
[702] TRK ABNDN
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
REPORT:YES
REPORT:YES
REPORT:NO
Page 2-127
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Use Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2.
4. Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS REPORT : YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 725 SMDR OPTIONS
MMC 425 ASSIGN CALLER ID TRUNKS
Page 2-128
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
418 BRI Card Restart
Enables any changes you make in MMC 419 (BRI Option) or MMC 423 (S/T Mode)
and applies them, as appropriate, to BRI card that you restart.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 418
Display shows first BRI or PRI circuit
[701] RESTART
Dial first trunk on a BRI or PRI card(e.g., 733)
OR
Press Volume button to select the first trunk
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor
[701] RESTART
Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO
Pressing 1 will advance to step 4
[701] RESTART
Dial 1 for YES or Dial 0 for NO
Pressing 1 or 0 will return to step 2
[701] RESTART
CARD RESTART?NO
CARD RESTART?NO
CARD RESTART?YES
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS
MMC 420 PRI OPTIONS
MMC 423 S/T MODE, MMC 424 BRI S0 MAPPING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-129
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
419 BRI Options
Assigns several options on a per-BRI basis and there are different options depending
on whether the BRI is programmed as a trunk or station in MMC 423.
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS TRUNKS
No
0
Option
Description
CHANNEL
When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free channel
ANY
of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy. If set to NO, you will
receive a busy signal if they attempt to access a busy channel even if the other
channel on that BRI is free.
1
BRI MODE
BRI access mode select.
P-P NOR
Point to Point NORmal. This operates like a standard telephone line with one
CO number per channel and ring according to MMC 406.
P-P DID
Point to Point Direct Inward Dial. This operates in a similar manner to an
analog DID circuit with multiple CO numbers pointed to a single channel and
translated within the system(MMC714) to a single device.
P-M NOR
Point to Multi-point NORmal. This type of circuit operates in a similar manner
to P-P NORmal but allows multiple devices to be attached to the circuit.
Ringing is defined in MMC 406.
P-M MSN
Point to Multi-point MSN. This setting is used when the line uses the MSN
supplementary service. Ringing is defined in MMC 421.
2
3
DLSEND
BRI dial sending mode select.
ENBLOCK
Digits will be collected and sent in a single block similar to a Cell phone.
OVERLAP
Digits will be sent as they are dialled by the user.
CLIP TABLE
Used to select the Calling Party Number to send to the network. In case of
NONE, MMC405 CO TRUNK NUMBER is sent to the network. In other cases,
MMC 323 Calling Party Number entry corresponding with the selected number
is sent to the network.
4
Page 2-130
NB TYPE
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number to send to the network.
UNKNOWN
Unknown number
INT.NAT
International number
NATIONAL
National number
NETWORK
Network specific number
SUBSCRIB
Subscriber number
EXTEN
Local number
ABBREV
Abbreviated number
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
5
Option
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Description
NB PLAN
Used to select the type of the Calling Party Number Plan to send to the
UNKNOWN
Unknown numbering plan
ISDN
ISDN numbering plan(CCITT E.163-164)
DATA
Data numbering plan(CCITT X.121)
TELEX
Telex numbering plan(CCITT F.69)
NATIONAL
National standard numbering plan
PRIVATE
Private numbering plan
EXTEN
Local numbering plan
network.
OPTIONS FOR BRI PORTS PROGRAMMED AS STATIONS
No
Option
0
ANY CHANNEL
Description
When this option is set to YES, the system will place calls on any free
channel of that BRI if the channel chosen by the user is busy(e.g., Preferred
channel selection). If set to NO, the user will receive a busy signal if they
attempt to access a busy channel even if the other channel on that BRI is
free(e.g., Exclusive channel selection).
1
POWER FEED
This field determines if power to a BRI access will be supplied.(YES or NO)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 419
Display shows first BRI channel
[701] BRI-TRK
2. Dial BRI trunk number(e.g., 702)
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI trunk and
Press Right Soft button.
[702] BRI-TRK
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CHANNEL ANY:YES
CHANNEL ANY:YES
Page 2-131
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
3. Select option item.
OR
Press Volume button to select option item and
Press Right Soft button.
[702] BRI-TRK
CHANNEL ANY:NO
[702] BRI-TRK
BRI MODE:P-M MSN
[702] BRI-TRK
DLSEND
:OVERLAP
[702] BRI-TRK
CLIP TABLE :NONE
[702] BRI-TRK
NB TYPE:UNKNOWN
4. Select option.
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
Press Right Soft button.
[702] BRI-TRK
5. Dial BRI station number(e.g., 703)
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
Press Right Soft button.
[703] BRI-STN
6. Select option item.
OR
Press Volume button to select BRI station and
Press Right Soft button.
[729] BRI-STN
CLIP TABLE:1
CHANNEL ANY:YES
CHANNEL ANY:YES
[703] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :NO
7. Select option.
OR
Press Volume button to select option item and
Press Right Soft button.
[703] BRI-STN
POWER FEED :YES
8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-132
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
For BRI Ports programmed as Trunks :
! CHANNEL ANY : YES
! BRI MODE : P-P DDI
! DLSEND : OVERLAP
! CLIP TABLE : NONE
! NB TYPE : NATIONAL
! NB PLAN : ISDN
For BRI Ports programmed as Stations :
! CHANNEL ANY : YES
! POWER FEED : NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO TRUNK NUMBER
MMC 421 MSN DIGITS
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 714 DID NAME AND NUMBER TRANSLATION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-133
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
421 MSN Digit
Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station. If any
entry in MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call’s called party number,
either the specific station is alerted, if it is programmed to accept the call, or the call
is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call.
If the incoming called party number does not have a matching entry in the MSN
table, MMC 406 ringing destination is alerted or the call is released by option.
You can give each MSN number to a specific station and you can select call waiting
option: when a destination is busy, the incoming call must be cleared or camped-on to
the station(which is alerted to the call).
There is a total of eight entries on a trunk basis and each entry consists of the
following fields :
Entry Field
Description
DIGIT
Digits to be received. There is a maximum of 16 digits
RING 1-6
These numbers correspond to the six ring plan destinations for this MSN.
The destinations can be either stations or station groups.
CALL WAIT
Toggles YES or NO : if YES then the call will be camped-on at busy destination while
NO gives busy indication.
OPTION
if Accept then the selected destination party will be alerted. If Reject then the call will
be cleared.
For each BRI access, two adjacent ports are assigned. You need only change the
value for one of the two ports; the value for the other port will be changed
automatically.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-134
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 421
Display shows
[701] MSN DGT (1)
DGT:
2. Enter trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll through ISDN
PORT and press Right Soft button to move
cursor
[704] MSN DGT (1)
DGT:
3. Enter the location 1-8(e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to select location and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[704] MSN DGT (4)
DGT:
4. Enter digits to be translated(e. g., 4603881) via
dial keypad and press Right Soft button to move
to the destination selection(Max. Digit is 12)
[704] MSN DGT (4)
DGT:4603881
5. Enter destinations for 6 ring plan via dial keypad
(e.g., 204 for ring plan 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[704] MSN DGT (4)
1:204
2:NONE
6. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[704] MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
7. Enter 1 for ACCEPT or 0 for REJECT
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[704] MSN DGT (4)
CW:NO OPT:ACEPT
8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 210 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER TENANT
MMC 423 S/T MODE
MMC 419 BRI OPTIONS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-135
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
422 Trunk COS
Used to assign a class of service to each trunk during one of the 6 different ring plans
available. There are 30 different classes of service that are defined in MMC 701
Assign COS Contents. Classes of service are numbered 01-30. Trunk COS applies on
Tandem connections.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Page 2-136
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 422
Display shows first trunk
[701] TRK COS
Dial trunk number(e.g., 702)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks
Press Right Soft button to advance step 3
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through trunks and
press Left Soft button to advance step 4
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks
[702] TRK COS
Enter day class of service(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to advance
step 4
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to
step 2
[702] TRK COS
1:01
1:01
2:01
2:01
3:01
3:01
[ALL] TRK COS
1:01
1:05
2:01
2:01
3:01
3:01
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4.
5.
Enter the next ring plan class of service
(e.g., 05)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Right Soft button to return to
step 2
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through classes of
service and press Left Soft button to return to
the previous step.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
[702] TRK COS
1:05
2:05
03:01
Press Transfer button and enter to save and exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to
next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL RING PLANS COS 01
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLANS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-137
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
423 Station/Trunk Mode
Allows the technician to select whether a BRI circuit is a station port or a trunk port.
Port Mode
Description
TRUNK
The BRI trunk port use ISDN trunk.
STATION
The BRI trunk port use for ISDN phone.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 423
Display shows first BRI
[701] S/T MODE
TRUNK
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 701)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through BRI
numbers and press Right Soft button to move
cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[701] S/T MODE
TRUNK
3. Enter Circuit type
OR
Press Volume button to select option
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[702] S/T MODE
STATION
[ALL] S/T MODE
TRUNK
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419 BRI OPTION
MMC 421 MSN DIGIT
MMC 424 S0 MAPPING
Page 2-138
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
424 BRI S0 Mapping
This MMC assigns an ISDN terminal number to a BRI station port.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 424
Display shows first terminal number
[8701]S0 MAPPING
2. Dial terminal number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection of
terminal numbers and press Right Soft button to
advance cursor
[8704]S0 MAPPING
3. Dial BRI port number
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through ports
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[8704]S0 MAPPING
NONE
NONE
712
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 419 BRI OPTION
MMC 423 S/T MODE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-139
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
425 Assign Caller ID Trunks
Allows the system administrator or technician to activate analog loop trunk Caller ID
on a per-trunk basis. Activating Caller ID will delay the incoming ring indication at
the operator by two ring cycles to allow for the collection of the calling party data.
Each trunk has the following options :
No
Option
Description
0
NORMAL
This is not a Caller ID trunk.
1
CID TRUNK
This is a Caller ID trunk.
Supports Bellcore type data only for Caller ID, others type will not supports. Available
in Australia, Israel and Italy only.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 425
Display shows
[701] CID TRUNK
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 702)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[702] CID TRUNK
3. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change options
OR
[702] CID TRUNK
Page 2-140
NORMAL
NORMAL
[ALL] CID TRUNK
?
CID TRUNK
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Press Volume button to select an option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
[702] CID TRUNK
CID TRUNK
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL TRUNKS ARE CID TRUNK
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 728 CID TRANSLATION TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-141
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
426 Trunk Gain Control
Allows loss levels to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are two adjustments
available in this MMC. ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk to the
station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk. See the Trunk
Gain Setting Tables for level option definitions.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 426
Display shows
[701] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
2. Enter desired trunk number(e.g., 702)
via the dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
[702] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
3. Press Volume button to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
[702] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:+0.0
4. Press Volume button to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor and
return to step 1
[702] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0 TX:-2.5
5. Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[ALL] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0
TX:+0.0
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
TX : +0.0
RX : +0.0
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-142
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
428 Assign Trunk/Trunk Use
This MMC is used to allow or restrict trunks from making outgoing calls to each
other within the same system.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 428
Display shows
(301) USE (301)
2. Dial the trunk use group number(e.g., 305)
OR
Press Volume button to selection and press Right
Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunk use
groups
(305) USE (301)
3. Dial the trunk use group number(e.g., 304)
OR
Press Volume button to selection and press Right
Soft button
(305) USE (304)
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
(305) USE (304)
DIAL:YES
DIAL:YES
(ALL) USE (301)
DIAL:YES
DIAL:YES
DIAL:NO
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-143
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
DIAL : YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 316 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 614 STATION/TRUNK USE GROUP
Page 2-144
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
434 Connection Status
This read only MMC will confirm the connection status of stations or trunks.
Display status actually displays the status of a station or trunk at the time requested.
If a conference is in progress with the selected trunk or station the display will show
one of the conference parties and an arrow("). The technician or system
administrator can then display the next parties in the conference. If a station or trunk
is in an idle state the display will show ‘IDLE’. If the station or trunk selected is not a
valid selection the display will show ‘INVALID DATA’. If the station or trunk is
made busy by the CPU the display will show ‘MADE BUSY’. If the station is in
busy state with no other connection, the display will show ‘BUSY’ only.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
TRANSFER Exit
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
Display trunk connection status
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter station or trunk number
Display show connection status
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
702
702
227
227
Display station connection status
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter station or trunk number
Display show connection status
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
235
235
703
703
Page 2-145
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Display trunk status in conference.
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter station or trunk number.
Display shows connection status
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Press Right Soft button to display the next
station or trunks involved
DISPLAY STATUS
4. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
702
702
216
227 ,215 "
216
"
702 ,227 "
Display status no connection.
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter station or trunk number
Display show connection status
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
702
702
NONE
NONE
Display status no connection.
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter invalid station or trunk number
Display show INVALID DATA
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
INVALID DATA
201
IDLE
Display connection status with invalid trunk or
station number.
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter invalid station or trunk number
Display show INVALID DATA
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
Page 2-146
INVALID DATA
201
IDLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Display connection status with trunk or station
number in maintenance busy.
1. Press Transfer button and enter 434
DISPLAY STATUS
201
IDLE
2. Enter station or trunk number
Display show connection status
DISPLAY STATUS
3. Enter another station or trunk OR
Press transfer to exit
DISPLAY STATUS
704
704
MADE BUSY
MADE BUSY
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 108 STATION STATUS
MMC 409 TRUNK STATUS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-147
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
436 Trunk TMC Gain
Allows loss levels for analog trunks to be adjusted on a per trunk basis. There are two
adjustments available in this MMC. ‘TX’ is the transmit level adjustment of the trunk
to the station. ‘RX’ is the receive level adjustment of the station to the trunk.
This MMC is not to correct low volume. To be used with the support of Samsung
Electronics Co. local distributor.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 436
Display shows
[701] TRK GAIN
2. Enter desired trunk number(e.g., 702) via the
dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select ALL
[702] TRK GAIN
3. Press Volume button to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
[702] TRK GAIN
4. Press Volume button to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor and
return to step 2
[701] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0
RX:+0.0
TX:+0.0
TX:+0.0
[ALL] TRK GAIN
RX:+0.0
RX:+0.0
RX:+0.0
TX:+0.0
TX:+0.0
TX:-2.5
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-148
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
TX : +0.0
RX : +0.0
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-149
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
500 System-Wide Counters
Used to set the values of the system counters. The counters are listed below with a
brief description of each.
No
Counter
Default
Description
0
ALARM REM. CNTER
5
The number of times that an alarm reminder will ring a
1
AUTO RDL COUNTER
3
station before cancelling. RANGE=1-99.
The number of times the system will redial an outside
number after the auto redial feature has been
activated. RANGE=1-99.
2
DISA CALL CNTER
99
3
DISA LOCK CNTER
3
Sets the maximum number of intercom calls that can
be made after accessing a DISA line. RANGE=1-99.
Number of attempts the system will allow to
incorrectly access a DISA line before locking out the
DISA line. RANGE=-99
4
NEW CALL COUNTER
99
Number of times the system will allow a user to signal
New Call on a Trunk line during one call. RANGE=199.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 500
Display shows
ALARM REM.CNTER
2. Enter number from above list(e.g., 6)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
3. Enter in new value via dial keypad
If entry is valid, system will return to step 2
UCDS AUDIO ALARM
05"
00"
00"02
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-150
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Page 2-151
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-152
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
501 System Timers
Allows the technician to adjust individual timers as necessary.
TIMER TABLE
Timer Name
ALARM TIME
Default
Range Unit
100
0-2500 MIN
Description
This is the time the system alarm key will start
ringing after the alarm key has been silenced.
ALERT TONE TIME
1000
100-2500
This timer sets the duration of the attention
MSEC
tone preceding a call to a phone in the Voice
Announce or Auto Answer mode. This tone will
also precede a forced Auto Answer call.
ALM REM.INTERVAL
25
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the time length between
ring attempts at a station when alarm reminder
is set.
ALM REM RING OFF
10
1-25 SEC
This timer controls the length of the ring cycle
duration when alarm reminder is set at a
station.
ATT. RECALL TIME
30
0-250 SEC
This is the length of time a transfer recall will
ring at a station before recalling the operator.
AUTO REDIAL INT.
30
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the time between attempts
after RETRY dialling is set on a station.
AUTO REDIAL RLS.
45
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of a Ring No
Answer condition on a retry number dialled
before the auto redial is automatically
cancelled.
CALLBACK NO ANS
30
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the time before the callback
is automatically cancelled when a callback
detects Ring No Answer.
CAMP ON RECALL
30
0-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of time a
camped-on call will stay at a destination before
recalling to the transferring station.
CID MSG RECEIVE
6
1-25 SEC
The amount of time that the system will allow a
valid message from the analog CID trunk.
CLI DISPLAY TIME
5
1-25 SEC
The amount of time that the Caller ID
information remains on the phone’s display.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-153
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Timer Name
CO CONFIRM TIME
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Default
3
Range Unit
0-250 MIN
Description
According to MMC 314 CO CONFIM type, the
outgoing call will be disconnected after this
timer or the outgoing caller will hear the
confirm tone every this time.
CO-CO
20
1-250 MIN
DISCONNECT
This timer monitors the duration of an
unsupervised conference; when it expires,
both trunks are disconnected.
CONFIRM TONE TM
DIAL PASS TIME
1000
3
100-2500
The tone heard when a feature is activated or
MSEC
deactivated.
0-25 SEC
This timer monitors the duration of time before
connecting the transmit of the phone to the
trunk side of an outgoing call.
DISA DISCONNECT
30
1-250 MIN
This timer controls the maximum duration of a
DISA call.
DISA LOCK OUT TM
30
1-250 MIN
This timer controls the duration of time a DISA
call is not allowed to be made after the DISA
error counter has expired(MMC 500).
DISA NOANS DISC.
30
0-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of time a DISA
call is disconnected by force when called party
does not answer.
DISA PASS CHECK
30
1-250 MIN
This timer defines the time period before the
system clears the incorrect passcode counter.
DISPLAY DELAY TM
3
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration a display is shown
in the LCD display. This timer also controls the
duration of time that error tone is heard.
DOOR LOCK RELES.
DOOR RING DETECT
DOOR RING OFF TM
500
50
30
100-2500
This timer controls the duration of time the
MSEC
door lock relay will be activated.
10-250
This timer controls the duration of time before
MSEC
a call is answered by the door phone.
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of ringing at
the door ring destination before automatically
cancelling.
E-HOLD RECALL TM
45
0-250 SEC
FIRST DIGIT TIME
10
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of time a call is
held exclusively at a station before recalling.
This timer controls how long the system will
wait for dialling to begin before dropping the
dial tone and returning the you to error tone.
HOK FLASH MAX TM
180
20-2500
This timer monitors the duration of a hook
MSEC
switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not a line noise or an accidental hook
switch bounce LONGEST duration.
Page 2-154
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Timer Name
Default
HOK FLASH MIN TM
70
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Range Unit
Description
20-2500
This timer monitors the duration of a hook
MSEC
switch flash to ensure that the flash is valid
and not a line noise or an accidental hook
switch bounce SHORTEST duration.
HOOK OFF TIME
300
20-2500 MSEC
This timer controls the time before dial tone is
sent to a single line station.
HOOK ON TIME
1000
20-2500 MSEC
This timer sets the minimum amount of time that
the system will recognize as an SLT hang up.
INQUIRY RELEASE
30
1-250 SEC
This timer monitors the duration of the
interaction of the Soft button to determine
when to return the LCD back to a normal
status. This timer affects only display phones.
INTER DIGIT TIME
10
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits before dropping the call
and returning you back to error tone.
ISDN INT DGT TM
7
1-15 SEC
This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits and the end of the dialling
string on an ISDN call.
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
30
10-250 SEC
This timer controls the grace period between
programming actions while in a programming
session. The timer automatically returns the
system to secure programming status.
LCR ADVANCE
5
1-250 SEC
TIME
This timer controls the duration of time before
selecting the next allowable route when a
station is allowed to route advance.
LCR INTER DIGIT
5
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the grace period between
dialling valid digits before accessing a trunk.
LONG KEY DETECT
600
0-2500 MSEC
This timer controls the time a key must be held
down before the key press is repeated.
LONG KEY REPEAT
300
0-2500 MSEC
This timer controls the time between repeated
digits on a long key press.
MS LED ON TIME
10
1-10 SEC
This timer controls the duration a Manual
Signalling key will remain on after use.
OFF HOOK RING INT
15
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of time
between ring bursts to a user who has a
camped-on call.
OHVA ANSWER
10
1-250 SEC
TIME
PAGE TIME OUT
This timer controls the time duration of an
OHVA call before automatic rejection.
20
1-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of a page
announcement.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-155
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Timer Name
PAGE TONE TIME
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Default
500
Range Unit
Description
100-2500
This timer controls the duration of tone burst
MSEC
heard over the page prior to the page
announcement.
PARK RECALL TIME
45
0-250 SEC
This timer controls the duration of time a call is
parked before recalling to the call park
originator.
PC-MMC LOCK TIME
5
1-60 MIN
This timer monitors the PCMMC activity, drops
the link if no action is created by PCMMC and
returns the system back to secure program
status.
POWER DOWN TIME
RECALL DISCONECT
2000
2
500-9900
This timer monitors the power to the ROM
MSEC
pack to begin shutdown status.
1-250 MIN
This is the time an attendant recall will ring
before being disconnected.
RECALL WAIT TIME
15
0-250 SEC
This is the time any recall(hold or transfer)
continues to recall at your station before it
recalls to the operator.
ROUTE OPTIMISE
5
0-250 SEC
When the call is made via Q-SIG signalling,
the route optimization is activated after this
time.
SMDR START/DP
30
1-250 SEC
This grace period timer starts SMDR recording
for rotary
SMDR START/DTMF
15
1-250 SEC
This grace period timer starts SMDR recording
for touchtone dialling. This timer also controls
the LCD duration timer on the phones. The
duration time displayed and the SMDR time
duration will be the same.
SYS HOLD RECALL
45
0-250 SEC
This timer determines the time calls can be left
on hold before recalling back to the holding
station. This is a system-wide timer. Setting
timer to 000 will defeat this feature and no
recalling will take place.
TRANSFER RECALL
20
0-250 SEC
This timer determines the time transferred
calls ring before recalling. This is a systemwide timer.
TSW CONN. DELAY
0
0-10 SEC
When incoming trunk makes outgoing call to
another trunk, the system connects voice path
after this time.
Page 2-156
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Certain timers are disabled when the value is ‘0’.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 501
Display shows first timer value
ALARM TIME
2. Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
3. Enter new value using keypad ; if valid, system
returns to step 2 with new value
KMMC LOCK OUT TM
0100 MIN"
060 SEC"
060 SEC"250
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME TIMERS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-157
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
502 Station-Wide Timers
Allows certain station timer values to be changed on a per-station basis or for all
stations.
No
0
Timer Name
NO ANS FWD
Description
This timer controls how long the station will ring before Forward on No
Answer takes place.(015 sec)
1
DTMF DUR.
This timer governs the duration of DTMF digits which are transmitted to
an external VMS system port. This can be used when a VMS system
fails to recognize the default DTMF digit duration being transmitted from
the SLT port.(0100 ms)
2
F-DGT DELY
This timer will be valuable for the system administrator to insert a suitable
delay before generating DTMF digits for In Band integration.(0600 ms)
3
OFFHK SEL.
This timer controls the grace period before placing an internal/external
call as programmed in MMC 306.(008 sec)
4
EFWD DELAY
This timer controls the External Call Forward feature which will allow a
station to ring before the call is placed on external call forwarding.
(010 sec)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 502
Display shows
[201] NO ANS FWD
2. Dial station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and
press Right Soft button
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all stations and
press Right Soft button
[205] NO ANS FWD
Page 2-158
015 SEC"
015 SEC"_
[ALL] NO ANS FWD
015 SEC"_
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Enter new value(must be three digits) via
dial keypad(e.g., 020)
System will return to step 2
[205] NO ANS FWD
4. Dial timer number from above list(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] DTMF DUR.
5. Enter new timer value(must be four digits,
e.g., 0200)
System returns back to step 2
[205] DTMP DUR.
015 SEC"020
0100 MS"_
0100 MS"0200
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NO ANS FWD : 015 SEC
DTMF DUR : 100 MSEC
F-DGT DELY : 600 MSEC
OFFHK SEL : 015 SEC
EFWD DELAY : 010 SEC
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 CALL FORWARD
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
MMC 306 HOT LINE/OFF HOOK SELECTION
MMC 726 VM/AA OPTIONS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-159
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
503 Trunk-Wide Timer
Allows certain trunk timer values to be changed on a per-trunk basis or for all trunks.
It is not advisable to change these values, with the exception of trunk Flash Time,
without assistance from Technical Support.
Timer Name
ANS.BAK TM
Description
ANSwer BAcK TiMe. This timer is used for certain types of E&M signaling and
does not affect normal CO lines.
CLEARING
This timer ensures that a call is fully disconnected at the CO by preventing CO
access outgoing or receiving incoming ring between a disconnect and the
expiration of this timer.
CO SUPV TM
CO SUPerVision TiMe this is the minimum length of loop open disconnect
received from the CO that will be seen as a valid hang up on the system.
DTMF DUR.
DTMF DURation This is the length of the DTMF digits that will be sent to the CO
on this line.
F-DGT DELY
First DiGiT DELaY This is the length of time the system will wait for CO line
conditions to stabilize after seizure before sending DTMF digits.
FLASH TIME
This is the duration of the momentary open sent on a circuit when FLASH key is
pressed.
NO RING TM
This is the length of time the system will wait after detecting a ring burst on a line
before deciding the call has disconnected.
PAUSE TIME
This is the length of time the system will wait before sending the next digit for a
pause in a speed dial bin.
PRS DET TM
This means the duration of PRS signal pulse. If the PRS signal is reversed when
opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite party
disconnect the call, the PRS DET TM must be set to 0.
RNG DET TM
RiNG DETect TiMe This is the minimum length of ring signal the system will
regard as a valid ring.
MF/DP INT
This is the interval between sending digit. In case of DTMF signal, over the
500ms will be serviced as 100 ms.
MFR DLY TM
This is a delay time to allocate the MFR after incoming trunk is detected. This is
to prevent the wrong detection of DTMF signal by noise.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-160
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 503
Display shows
[701] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS"
2. Dial trunk number(e.g., 704)
OR
Press Volume button to select trunk and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all trunks
[704] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS"
3. Dial timer number from the list
OR
Press Volume button to select timer and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[704] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS"_
4. Enter new timer value
(must be four digits, e.g., 0200)
System returns to step 2
[704] DTMF DUR.
0100 MS"0200
[ALL] ANS.BAK TM
0600 MS"_
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
Timer Name
Value
Range
ANS.BAK TM
0600 MSEC
0-2500 MSEC
CLEARING
1000 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
CO SUPV TM
2500 MSEC
10-2500 MSEC
DTMF DUR.
0100 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
F-DGT DELY
0600 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
FLASH TIME
0600 MSEC
20-2500 MSEC
NO RING TM
04 SEC
1-25 SEC
PAUSE TIME
03 SEC
1-25 SEC
PRS DET TM
0000 MSEC
0-2500 MSEC
RNG DET TM
0050 MSEC
10-2500 MSEC
WINK TIME
200 MSEC
100-300 MSEC
MF/DP INT
0800 MSEC
100-9900 MSEC
MFR DLY TIME
00 SEC
0-25 SEC
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-161
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
504 Pulse Make/Break Ratio
Allows the ability to change the value of pulses per second and the duration of the
make/break time. This will only affect rotary dial trunks.
0 : Make/Break Ratio(01-99)
1 : Pulse Per Second(10 or 20)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 504
Display shows
MAKE/BREAK RATIO
2. Dial 0 or 1 for option
OR
Press Volume button for selection and press Right
Soft button to move cursor
PULSE PER SECOND
3. Dial new value
System returns to step 2
PULSE PER SECOND
33 MAKE"
10 PPS"_
10 PPS"20
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
MAKE/BREAK : 3 MAKE
PULSES PER SECOND : 10 PPS
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 402 TRUNK DIAL TYPE
Page 2-162
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
505 Assign Date And Time
Allows the system date and time to be set. This will set the system-wide clock.
Display
Meaning
Range
YY
Year
00-99
MM
Month
01-12
DD
Date
01-31
W
Day
0-6(0 : SUN, 1 : MON, 2 : TUE, 3 : WED, 4 : THU, 5 : FRI, 6 : SAT)
HH
Hour
00-23
MM
Minute
00-59
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 505
Display shows
OLD:0111095:0901
2. Enter new time and date using above table
System returns to step 2
OLD:0111095:0901
3. Verify time and date
Re-enter if necessary
OLD:0111121:1445
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
NEW:0111121:1445
NEW:YYMMDDW:HHMM
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
FOLLOW SOFTWARE DATE 12:00
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS : AUTO UPDATE TIME
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-163
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
506 Tone Cadence
Provides the ability to customize the tone cadence on a system-wide basis.
The system can provide eleven types of tone and three types of tones provided from
Central Office or PBX system can be detected. Please call Technical Support before
changing any cadences as some systems may require default settings.
Tone Type
Description
BUSY TONE
The called station is busy.
CONFM/BARGE
A feature has been successfully activated/cleared or a Barge In with Tone has
been performed.
DIAL TONE
The system is ready to interpret key presses/dialled digits.
DND/NO MORE
The called station is in DND or has no free CALL buttons.
ERROR TONE
An error has been made.
HOLD/CAMPON
This is the system generated hold tone.
MSGWAT TONE
This is the tone heard at an SLT with a message waiting.
RGBACK TONE
The called station is ringing.
RING TONE
This is the tone heard from ROP device or Loud Bell when these devices are
called.
TRANSFERER
This is the tone heard when the transfer button is pressed or an SLT hook
TONE
flashes.
DID RNGBACK
This is the tone heard by the outside party when they dial a DID number.
CO BUSY TONE
This is used to detect the busy tone provided from Central Office or PBX system.
CO RING BACK
This is used to detect the ring back tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.
CO DIAL
This is used to detect the dial tone provided from Central Office or PBX
system.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1. Press Transfer button and enter 506
Display shows
Page 2-164
DISPLAY
BUSY TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
2. Dial tone number from above list(00-13, e.g., 09)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone, press Left
Soft button and advance to step 3
TRANSFERER TONE
INTERRUPT TONE
3. Dial tone option 0 for CONTINUOUS or 1 for
INTERRUPT
OR
Press Volume button to select tone control and
press Right Soft button to advance step 4
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
TRANSFERER TONE
4. Dial new value for interrupt times
(must be four digits)
Press Right Soft button advances cursor
Press Left Soft button retreats cursor
If valid entry, system returns to step 2
TRANSFERER TONE:0100
INTERRUPT TONE
9900 0100 9900
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
[Unit : milliseconds]
Tone
On
Off
On
Off
BUSY TONE
350
350
350
350
CONFIRM/BARGE-IN
250
250
250
1250
DIAL TONE
CONTINUOUS
DND/NO MORE TONE
250
250
250
250
ERROR TONE
200
200
200
200
HOLD/CAMP-ON TONE
500
3500
500
3500
MESSAGE WAIT TONE
1000
250
1000
250
RING BACK TONE
1000
4000
1000
4000
RING TONE
1000
2000
1000
2000
100
100
100
100
1000
2000
1000
2000
TRANSFER TONE
DID RING BACK
TONE
CO BUSY TONE
CO RING BACK TONE
CO DIAL TONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
350
350
350
350
1000
4000
1000
4000
CONTINUOUS
Page 2-165
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-166
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
507 Assign Ring Plan Time
Use this MMC to program Ring Plans time settings. Ring Plans provide six separate
ringing destinations based on day of the week and time of day. The start time within a
plan is the time the system will switch from one ringing destination to the next.
The end time is the time the system will switch from that plan to the previous plan.
A RPO(Ring Plan Override) key is not needed as the system will switch
automatically; however, it is helpful to have a dedicated button so the status can be
manually changed if needed. If a ring plan has no time entry the ring plan defaults to
ring plan 1. The ring plans correlate with all MMC’s that program ring or termination
destinations and station and trunk COS.
Use the following example of assigning Ring Plans :
Ring Plan
Start Time
End Time
(MON : 1)
ST : 0000
END : 23:59
(MON : 2)
ST : 0800
END : 2200
(MON : 3)
ST : 1000
END : 2000
(MON : 4)
ST : 1200
END : 1800
(MON : 5)
ST : 1300
END : 1600
(MON : 6)
ST : 1400
END : 1500
Using a 24 hour clock in the example above notice that the END time is within the
same 24 hour period. The system will stay in the last active Ring Plan from the
previous day until the end time which is 23:59. Monday starts the Ring Plan 1 at
00:00. The system will stay Ring Plan 1 until 08:00 and will stay in Ring Plan 2 until
Ring Plan 3 starts. As each ring Plan start it will override the previous Ring Plan.
If a Ring Plan ends and there are no additional Ring Plans the system will default to
the Ring Plan with time that extends past the expired ring plan time.
Ring Plans must be programmed in sequence. IE. RP 1, 2, 3, 4 etc.
A Ring Plan cannot be omitted. IE. RP 1, 2, 5 etc.
A higher numbered Ring Plan cannot have a START time before a lower numbered
Ring Plan.
Ring Plan 1 is the default Ring Plan of each day. If no Ring Plan destination is input
the operator group is the default destination.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-167
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 507
Display shows
RING PLAN (SUN:1)
2. Dial day number(0-6, e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select day
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 3
RING PLAN (WED:1)
3. Dial ring plan number(1-6, e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to select day
Press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 4
RING PLAN (WED:2)
4. Dial start time,(e.g., 1030)
If valid, cursor moves to end time
Enter end time
If valid, system returns to step 2
Begin again
RING PLAN (WED:1)
ST:
ST:
ST:_
END:
END:
END:
ST:1030 END:1800
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
START : NONE
END : NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 202 FEATURE PASSCODE
MMC 512 HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 701 STATION COS
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Page 2-168
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
508 Call Cost
Allows the system administrator to set the Call Cost attributes generated by the
system during a call. This information can be displayed on the phone LCD during a
call or as an SMDR record.
No
Display
0
UNIT COST PER MP
Description
When the system is installed to receive MP on a C. O. outgoing
call. It is used for generating total call cost by multiplying it by the
number of pulses. Allows a maximum value of 9999.
1
CALL COST RATE
This generates additional call cost calculated by multiplying this rate
by the original call cost. Ranges from 100 through 255.
Changing this value when there is a call in progress may result in an inaccurate call
cost. This MPD facility requires the Metering Pulse Detection version of the trunk
card.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 508
Display shows
UNIT COST PER MP
2. Dial 0 OR 1(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to select , and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
CALL COST RATE
3. Enter new value(e.g., 110 for 110 percent)
System returns to step 2
CALL COST RATE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
0100PESET"
100 %"
110 %
Page 2-169
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
UNIT COST PER MP : 100 PERCENT
CALL COST RATE : 100 PERCENT
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 110 STATION ON/OFF : CALL COST OPTION
Page 2-170
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
510 SLI Ring Cadence
Provides the ability to customize the ring cadence for single line ports on a systemwide basis. There are 5 cadences available. Please call Technical Support before
changing any cadences as some peripheral systems may require default settings.
No
Ring Type
Description
1
STN RING
This is the cadence intercom calls will ring at.
2
TRK RING
This is the cadence trunk calls will ring at.
3
DOOR RING
This is the cadence door phone calls will ring at.
4
ALM RING
This is the cadence alarm reminder calls will ring at.
5
CBK RING
This is the cadence callbacks will ring at.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 510
Display shows
1:STN RING :0400
2. Dial cadence number from above list(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to select , press LEFT
Soft button and advance to step 3
3:DOOR RING:0400
3. Dial new value for interrupt times
(must be four digits)
Press Right Soft button advances cursor
Press Left Soft button retreats cursor
If valid entry, system returns to step 2
3:DOOR RING:0100
0200 0400 3000
0100 0400 2000
9900 0100 9900
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-171
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
[Unit : milliseconds]
Ring Type
On
Off
On
Off
STN RING
0400
0200
0400
3000
TRK RING
1000
3000
1000
3000
DOOR RING
0400
0100
0400
2000
ALM RING
0200
0200
0200
2000
CBK RING
0200
0200
0200
4000
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-172
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
512 Holiday Assignment
This MMC defines up to 60 holiday dates throughout the year. The system will
override the normal ring plan for these days and remain in the ring plan associated
with the holiday. Dates are entered in a month day format. For example July 4th
would be 0704. One ring plan applies to all holidays.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 512
Display shows the Ring Plan
RING PLAN
2. Press Right Soft button advance cursor.
Press Volume button to select a Ring Plan
OR
Use the dial keypad to select a Ring Plan(e.g., 2)
RING PLAN
3. Press the Right Soft button to enter and advance
cursor
RING PLAN
4. Press Volume button to scroll to
Assign Holiday and press Right Soft button to
advance cursor.
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
5. Press Volume button to select entry and press
Right Soft button enter and advance cursor
ASSIGN HOLIDAY
6. Dial date using the dial keypad for holiday
(e.g., 0704)
ASSIGN HOLLIDAY
FOLLOW 1
FOLLOW 2
FOLLOW 2
01:
05:
05:0704
7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-173
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NO HOLIDAY ASSIGNED
FOLLOW RING PLAN 1
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 507 ASSIGN RING PLAN TIME
Page 2-174
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
514 Tone Source
This program is assigned external tone source instead of system tone. There are 7
types of tone for external tone source.
No
Tone Type
0
BUSY TONE
1
DIAL TONE
2
DND/NO MORE
3
TRANSFER TONE
4
MSG WAIT TONE
5
ERROR TONE
6
RGBACK TONE
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 514
Display shows
BUSY TONE
2. Enter the system tone number(0-6)
OR
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
DIAL TONE
3. Dial a number for external tone source
OR
Press Volume button to select tone number and
press Right Soft button to store
DIAL TONE
TONE
TONE
371
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-175
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
TONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-176
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
515 Assign Daylight Saving Date
Allows the Technician to program the start dates and end dates of daylight saving
time on a system for the current year and the next 9 years. System will automatically
add 1 hour to the system clock at 02.00(2.00 a.m.) on the Start date and subtract 1
hour from the system clock at 02.00(2.00 a.m.) on the End date.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
TRANSFER Used to exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 515
Display shows
NO:YY:START:END
2. Enter entry number(e.g., 00 for current year)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
NO:YY:START:END
3. Enter year(e.g., 03 for 2003)
OR
Press Volume button to select year and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
NO:YY:START:END
4. Enter the start date in format MMDD.
(e.g., 30th March would be 0330)
NO:YY:START:END
5. Enter the start date in format MMDD.
(e.g., 26th October would be 1026)
NO:YY:START:END
00:
00:
:
:
00:03:
:
:
:
00:03:0330 :
00:03:0330 :1026
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to save and advance to next
MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-177
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 DATE AND TIME
MMC 861 SYSTEM OPTIONS : AUTO UPDATE TIME
Page 2-178
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
600 Assign Operator Group
Used to assign an operator group for each ring plan.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 600
Display shows
OPERATOR GROUP
2. Dial the ring plan number(1-6)
OR
Press the Right Soft button to advance the cursor
OPERATOR GROUP
3. Dial the group number
OR
Press Volume button to select group and press
Right Soft button
OPERATOR GROUP
1:500
1:500
1:501
2:500
2:500
2:500
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
RING PLAN 1-6 : 500
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 211 DOOR RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 406 TRUNK RINGING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-179
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
601 Assign Station Group
This MMC is used to build all station groups. There are 10 programmable groups
available in a OfficeServ 12 system.
The options for setting up these groups are as follows :
No
0
Option / Description
TYPE : This is the type of group you are creating and can be one of the following :
0 NORMAL : Used to assign stations in a ring group. The members can be stations,
common bell contacts.
1 VMAA GROUP: Used to group a number of voice mail port extensions. These must have
been defined in MMC 207 as VMAA ports or they cannot be entered here. Check all
programming in MMC 726 to ensure that the In band DTMF codes are properly set.
2 SVM GROUP : Voice mail group for the SVM-400. Can only have distribute or sequential
ringing.
1
RING MODE : Each group can have one of the following ring modes. This will decide how
calls are placed to the group.
0 SEQUENTIAL : The stations listed as 'members'(see below) will be called on a first
available basis. Calls will first go to the first member, if the first member is busy, calls will
go to the second member, if the second member is busy, calls will go to the third member
etc. This type of group is useful for placing the bulk of the incoming calls to a selected
individual, with other members only getting the calls when the first member is busy.
The number of members allowed for a sequential group is 20.
1 DISTRIBUTED : The first call will go to the first member, the second call will go to the
second member, the third call will go to the third member. This type of group is useful for
evenly distributing the call among all group members. The number of members allowed
for a distributed group is 20.
2 UNCONDITIONAL : Calls are placed to all group members simultaneously. This reduces
the number of members of the groups to 8. If a group member is busy, they can receive
off hook ring if defined in MMC 300. This ring mode option is not available for VMAA
group. The SGR INC BUSY option is not available for unconditional ring mode.
2
OVERFLOW : This is the timer value that will cause unanswered calls to a group to begin
also ringing the NEXT PORT(see below) after this timer has elapsed. If set to 000, no
overflow will take place.
3
GROUP TRANSFER : This is a timer that will determine how long Trunk Line calls transferred
to the group will ring at the group before recalling. If set to 000, no recall will take place.
Page 2-180
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
4
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Option / Description
NEXT PORT : This is the station or group number that callers will also ring at if the OVERFLOW
feature has been programmed. The OVERFLOW DESTINATION can be defined as :
1 COMMON BELL There are up to 1 on OfficeServ 12 system. Because there is a common
bell port on each MISC card.
2 RING OVER PAGE The ROP port can be defined as the NEXT port.
3 STATION OR STATION GROUP. Any station or station group can be defined as the NEXT
port.
5
MEMBER : List all members that are to be in the group. Up to 20 members for the system
are allowed in each group, but stations can be assigned to multiple station groups
6
NEXT HUNT : The length of time a call will ring at a station before it hunts to the next group
member.
7
GROUP BUSY : When this option is set to ON, a busy signal will be sent to the caller if all
group members are busy. When this option is set to OFF, the ring back tone is sent to the
caller even if all group members are busy.
8
GRP AUTOANS : When this option is set to ON, a group call follows auto answer option
also.
Calls to a group do not follow the call forwarding instructions of any stations in the
group.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 601
Display shows
[501] STN.GROUP
2. Dial group number(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select group and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
[505] STN.GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
TYPE:NORMAL GRP
Page 2-181
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
3. Dial feature option number(0-7, e.g., 0)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll options and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[505] STN GROUP
4. DIAL group type(e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
Press Left Soft button to move cursor to TYPE
5. Dial feature option number(0-6, e.g., 1)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll options and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[505] STN GROUP
6. Dial ring option(0-2, e.g., 0)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
Press Left Soft button to move cursor
back to RING or press Right Soft button to
return to step 2
[505] STN GROUP
7. Dial next feature option and continue
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
[505] STN GROUP
TYPE:VMAA GROUP
TYPE:VMAA GROUP
[505] STN GROUP
RING:DISTRIBUTE
RING:SEQUENTIAL
RING:SEQUENTIAL
8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NORMAL GROUP
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 203 ASSIGN UA DEVICE
MMC 600 ASSIGN OPERATOR GROUP
Page 2-182
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
602 Station Group Name
Allows the system administrator or technician to enter an 11-character name to
identify an individual station group.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing
the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name
is ‘SAMSUNG,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Now press the
number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table
below to complete your message. Pressing ‘A button’ changes the letter from upper
case to lower case.
When the character that you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the
previous character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the
Volume Down button to move cursor left. A space can be entered by using these
keys.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,, %,
$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-183
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 602
Display shows
[500] SGR NAME
2. Dial group number(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press LEFT or Right Soft button to move cursor
[505] SGR NAME
3. Enter in name using above method and table
[505] SGR NAME
TELECOMS
4. Press LEFT or Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 104 STATION NAME
MMC 404 TRUNK NAME
MMC 601 ASSIGN STATION GROUP
Page 2-184
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
603 Assign Trunk Group
Allows the assignment of trunks to a specific trunk group or to several trunk groups.
This is very useful in the programming of LCR when more than one trunk is to be in
several dialling plans. There are two different modes of operation : (1) sequential and
(2) distribute. There are 10 programmable trunk groups with up to 30 members per
group.
One trunk can appear in more than one trunk group. If necessary, delete the trunk
member from other groups to prevent accidental access.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 603
Display shows
[9]
2. Enter in valid trunk group(e.g., 9)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor
[9]
3. Press Right Soft button to change mode
OR
Press Volume button to change mode to member
[9]
4. Press Right Soft button to move cursor to
number of member and enter valid member
number (e.g., 05) via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[9]
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
TRK GROUP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:NONE
TRK GROUP
MEMBER 05:NONE
Page 2-185
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
5. Enter valid trunk number(e.g., 701)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
[9]
TRK GROUP
MEMBER 01:701
6. Repeat steps 1-5 to remove trunk from group 9 if
necessary
7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL LOOP/ISDN TRUNKS : 9
ALL TIE TRUNKS : 801
ALL VOIP NETWORKING TRUNKS : 803
ALL VOIP H.323 TRUNKS : 804
ALL VOIP SIP TRUNKS : 805
RELATED ITEMS
LCR PROGRAMMING
VOIP NETWORKING FEATURE
VOIP GATEWAY FEATURES
Page 2-186
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
604 Assign Station To Page Zone
Allows the technician to assign a phone to any of the five internal paging zones.
Each page zone can have up to 16 members. A phone may be assigned to more than
one zone. Page zone(*) will page all external page zones as well as all phones that are
members of page zone 0.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 604
Display shows
INT.PAGE ZONE(0)
MEMBER 01:NONE
2. Enter the page zone number(0-4, e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
3. Enter index number(e.g., 05) via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 05:NONE
4. Enter station number(e.g., 205) via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
INT.PAGE ZONE(3)
MEMBER 01:NONE
MEMBER 05:205
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NO STATIONS ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-187
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
605 Assign External Page Zone
Determines which relays will close when one of the four external page zones is accessed.
One external page port and one optional port are located on the the base board. The
page relay has default DNs of 361. Optional relay has 362.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 605
Display shows first page zone
EXT. PAGE ZONE(5)
2. Dial page zone number(e.g., 6)
OR
Use Volume button to select desired page zone
numbers and press Right Soft button to move the
cursor
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
3. Dial member number(e.g., 3)
OR
Use Volume button to select member numbers
and press Right Soft button to move the cursor
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2 above
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
4. Dial relay number via dial keypad(e.g., 362)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3 above
EXT. PAGE ZONE(6)
MEMBER 1 :NONE
MEMBER 1 :NONE
MEMBER 3 :NONE
MEMBER 3 :362
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-188
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-189
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
606 Assign Speed Block
Provides a means of adding or deleting speed dial blocks to the system or an
individual phone. With the ability to delete a block or blocks of speed dial, it will not
be necessary to waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or stations that do
not require the ability to use speed dial. The Free List will show how many bins are
left to be assigned.
A library of up to 2500 speed dial numbers may be allocated as needed. The system
list can have up to 500 numbers and each station can have up to 50 numbers. Speed
dial numbers are assigned in blocks of ten. Each speed number may contain up to 24
digits.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
TRANSFER Used to exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 606
Display shows
FREE LIST:20
2. Press Right Soft button to advance next line.
FREE LIST:20
SYSTEM:20
SYSTEM:20
OR
You can view BUSY LIST using Volume button
BUSY LIST:180
SYSTEM:20
3. Make a selection of SYSTEM or EXT using
Volume button and press Right Soft button to
advance cursor
FREE LIST:20
4. Enter desired extension number via dial keypad
(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor
FREE LIST:20
Page 2-190
EXT201:1
EXT205:1
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
5. Enter valid number for bins
(e.g., 0-5 for EXT or 00-50 for SYSTEM)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s)
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
FREE LIST:20
EXT205:5
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM : 200 ENTRIES
STATIONS : 1 BLOCKS ASSIGNED
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 105 STATION SPEED DIAL
MMC 106 STATION SPD NAME
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-191
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
608 Assign Review Block
Provides means of adding or deleting CID review blocks to an individual phone.
With the ability to delete a block or blocks of CID review, it will not be necessary to
waste these on such items as voice mail, DPIMs or for phones that do not have
displays. The free list will show how many bins are left to be assigned. The system
has 2000 total bins. Each phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
TRANSFER To exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 608
Display shows first station
[201] REVIEW BLK
2. Enter desired EXT number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
[205] REVW BLOCK
3. Enter valid number for bins(e.g., 5)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s)
[205] REVW BLOCK
10:0060 FREE
10:0060 FREE
50:0010 FREE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
PHONES : 10 BINS
RELATED ITEMS
CALL LOG FEATURE : INCOMING CALL
Page 2-192
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
609 Call Log Block
Provides means of adding or deleting Call LOG blocks to an individual phone. With
the ability to delete a block or blocks, it will not be necessary to waste these on such
items as voice mail, DPIMs or for phones that do not have displays. The free list will
show how many bins are left that be assigned. The system has 2000 total bins. Each
phone may be assigned a maximum of 50 bins.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
TRANSFER To exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 609
Display shows first station
[201] LOG BLOCK
2. Enter desired EXT number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
[205] LOG BLOCK
3. Enter valid number for bins(e.g., 5)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection
OR
Press Hold button to delete bin(s)
[205] LOG BLOCK
10:0070 FREE
10:0070 FREE
50:0030 FREE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
PHONES : 10 BINS
RELATED ITEMS
CALL LOG FEATURE : OUTGOING CALL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-193
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
611 Allow Text Messaging
This program allows you to send a text message to a busy station or during an
OHVA. Up to 100 stations can be set to the system.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
TRANSFER To exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 611
Display shows
[201] TMSG STN
2. Enter the number of a station
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
[202] TMSG STN
3. Specify whether text message will be used or
not.
[202] TMSG STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
NOT USED:100 FREE
USED
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit the
program.
OR
Press Speaker button to move on to the next
program.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 117 TEXT MESSAGE
Page 2-194
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
612 Allow Group Conference
This program allows a station to use the Group conference call feature. Up to 100
stations can be allowed in the system. Each user can have up to 5 pre programmed
conferences.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
TRANSFER To exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 612
Display shows
[201] CONF STN
2. Enter the number of a station
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
[202] CONF STN
3. Specify whether a group conference be used
or not.
[205] CONF STN
NOT USED:100 FREE
NOT USED :100 FREE
USED
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit the
program
OR
Press Speaker button to move on to the next
program.
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 118 CONFERENCE GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-195
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
614 Station/Trunk Use Group
This program allows you to set a call group in which each station or Trunk line is
included. It is useful if you want to limit a call between stations, outgoing calls
through a Trunk line, or call-pickup.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear entry
TRANSFER To exit programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 614
Display shows first station
STATION GROUP
2. Enter [0] if you want to set a call group to a station.
Enter [1] if user want to set a call
group to a trunk
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor
TRUNK GROUP
3. Enter a number you want
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
TRUNK GROUP
4. Enter the number of the call group you
want to set
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
TRUNK GROUP
201:001
701:301
702:301
702:302
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit the
program
OR
Press Speaker button to move on to the next
program
Page 2-196
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS : 001
ALL TRUNKS : 301
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 304 ASSIGN EXTENSION/TRUNK USE
MMC 316 COPY STATION/TRUNK USE
MMC 317 ASSIGN STATION/STATION USE
MMC 428 ASSIGN TRUNK/TRUNK USE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-197
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
615 MGI Group
This optional program sets designated MGI ports for specific services. This allows
‘grading’ of MGI card for traffic conditions. The MGI ports can be segregated into
groups. Keep in mind that any entries made here can be ineffective,
if conflicting entries exist in MMC616.
No
0
MGI Port Type
LOCAL ITP
Description
This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones across a
private IP network
1
PUB IP ITP
This determines what MGI ports can be used with ITP phones on a public
IP network.
2
VOIP NTWK
This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 12 systems across a
private IP network.
3
PUB IP NTWK
This determines what MGI ports can be used for enhanced proprietary
Samsung VoIP networking between OfficeServ 12 systems on a public IP
network
4
VOIP TRUNK
This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard H.323
or SIP VoIP trunks for communications across a private network
5
PUB IP TRK
This determines what MGI ports can be used as industry-standard H.323
or SIP VoIP trunks for communications on a public network
6
MGI3 NEEDED
This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications across a private network.
7
PUB IP MGI3
This determines what MGI ports can be used for T.38 facsimile
communications on a public network.
8
ITP PAGED
This determines what MGI ports can be used with station page to ITP
phones across a private IP network
The MGI ports can be allow two selection modes : Sequential or Distributed.
The members of each selection are the actual ports on the MGI card.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
Page 2-198
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 615
Display shows the first available option
USER: LOCAL ITP
2. Press Volume button to select an user type
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
USER: LOCAL ITP
3. Press Volume button to select an option and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
USER: LOCAL ITP
4. Press Volume button to select an data and
press Right Soft button to store data and
move cursor to return to Step 1
USER: LOCAL ITP
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
MODE:SEQUENTIAL
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 616 MGI USER
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFORMATION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-199
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
616 MGI User
This optional program selects which specific MGI ports will be dedicated on a perport basis for IP station/trunk devices. If this MMC is not utilized, allocation of MGI
ports will be controlled by MMC615. By defining dedicated MGI port usage, the IP
station/trunk selected will always use the port programmed. MGI ports can be
assigned for digital stations(2XX), private and public ITP stations(32XX), VoIP
Networking trunks(83XX), H.323 trunks(84XX), SIP trunks(85XX). Only one
assignment per MGI port is permitted. Any entries made here will override entries
made in MMC615.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 616
Display shows the first available option
[3801] MGI USER
2. Enter MGI dial number
OR
Press Volume button to select an MGI port and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[3801] MGI USER
3. Enter MGI user dial number
OR
Press Volume button to select an MGI user and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor
[3801] MGI USER
NONE
NONE
NONE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-200
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 616 MGI USER
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFORMATION
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-201
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
700 Copy COS Contents
This MMC allows the technician to duplicate a class of service to make it easier to
have multiple similar classes of service.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
‘F’ KEY
Used to advance MMC 701
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 700
Display shows
COPY COS ITEMS
2. Dial selected COS to copy(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor and advance
to next step
COPY COS ITEMS
3. Dial target COS(e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor back to step 2
COPY COS ITEMS
4. Press F key to advance MMC 701 and press
RIGHT soft to advance cursor
COS CONTENTS(06)
COS01"COS01
COS05"COS01
COS05"COS06
TOLL LEVEL:A
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
Page 2-202
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
701 Assign COS Contents
Similar to MMC 700 but does not allow a copy command. This MMC is primarily
used for creating a new class of service. If the unsupervised conference feature is
allowed, a programmed CONF key must be available to allow re-entry into a
conference call. There are 30 classes of service available.
This MMC is divided into 4 categories.
No
0
1
COS/Description
TOLL
LEVEL
0
A
Follow toll class A(Unrestricted)
1
B
Follow toll class B in MMC 702, 703
2
C
Follow toll class C in MMC 702, 703
3
D
Follow toll class D in MMC 702, 703
4
E
Follow toll class E in MMC 702, 703
5
F
Follow toll class F in MMC 702, 703
6
G
Follow toll class G in MMC 702, 703
7
H
Follow toll class H(All restricted)
USABLE FEATURES
No
COS
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
00
AA CALER
YES
Auto answer control by caller
01
ABSENCE
YES
Absence
03
AUTO RDL
YES
Retry on busy
04
CALLBACK
YES
Callback
05
CLIP ABN
YES
Caller ID Abandon
06
CLIP INQ
YES
Caller ID Inquire
07
CLIP INV
YES
Caller ID Investigate
08
CONFER.
YES
Conference
09
DALM CLR
YES
DISA alarm ring clear
10
DIRECT.
YES
Directory dial
11
DISA
YES
Allow DISA use
12
DND
YES
Do Not Disturb
13
DND FWRD
YES
Forward Do Not Disturb
14
DND OVRD
NO
Do Not Disturb override
15
DOOR
YES
Door ring answer
16
DSS
YES
Direct station select
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-203
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
1
Page 2-204
COS/Description
No
COS
DEFAULT
DESCRIPTION
17
DTS
YES
Direct trunk select
19
EXT FWD
YES
External call forward
20
FEATURE
YES
Transfer button
21
FLASH
YES
Trunk flash
22
FOLLOW-ME
YES
Call forward-follow me
23
FORWARD
YES
Call forwarding
25
GRP I/O
YES
Group in/out
26
HOLD
YES
Hold
27
HOTLINE
YES
Hot line and Off hook selection
28
INTERCOM
YES
Intercom call
30
MESSAGE
YES
Message
31
MM PAGE
YES
Meet me page
32
NEW CALL
YES
New call
33
OHVAED
YES
Receive Off hook voice announcement
34
OHVAING
YES
Make Off hook voice announcement
35
ONEA2
YES
1A2 emulation
36
OPERATOR
YES
Call to Operator
37
OUT TRSF
YES
Outgoing transfer
38
OVERRIDE
NO
Barge-In
39
PAGE 0
YES
Page zone 0 Paging
40
PAGE 1
YES
Page zone 1 Paging
41
PAGE 2
YES
Page zone 2 Paging
42
PAGE 3
YES
Page zone 3 Paging
43
PAGE 4
YES
Page zone 4 Paging
44
PAGE 5
YES
Page zone 5 Paging
45
PAGE 6
YES
Page zone 6 Paging
49
PAGE *
YES
Page zone *
51
PICKUP
YES
Call pickup
*52
PRB
YES
Privacy Release and Bridge
53
REM. HOLD
YES
Remote Hold
54
RNG PLAN
YES
Ring Mode Change
55
SECURE
YES
Barge-In secure
56
SET RLOC
NO
Set Relocation
57
SSPD TOL
YES
System Speed dial toll check
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
No
1
2
COS/Description
No
COS
STN LOCK
YES
Station Lock
59
SYS SPD
YES
System Speed dial
61
TRK EHLD
YES
Trunk call exclusive hold
62
UNCO CNF
YES
Unsupervised Conference
63
VM AREC
NO
Auto Record(SVM-400)
64
VM AME
NO
Answer Machine Emulation(SVM-400)
65
VM REC
NO
Call Record(SVM-400)
YES
Station group 01-10 calling
YES
Trunk group 01-10 calling
CALL STATION GROUPS
CALL TRUNK GROUPS
TRK GROUP 01-30
4
DESCRIPTION
58
STN GROUP 01-80
3
DEFAULT
CALL TO SVM STN
LCD DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
SVM STN 01
SVM-400 port calling
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-205
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 701
Display shows
COS CONTENTS(01)
2. Dial COS(e.g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
COS CONTENTS(06)
3. Dial COS contents categories.
(e.g., 1 for usable feature)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS categories and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
COS CONTENTS(06)
4. Dial COS usable feature option(e.g., 12)
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
COS CONTENTS(06)
5. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES
OR
Press Volume button to select option and
press Right Soft button to return to step 4
COS CONTENTS(06)
TOLL LEVEL:A
TOLL LEVEL:A
00:AA CALER :YES
12:DND
12:DND
:YES
:NO
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 700 COPY COS CONTENTS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
TOLL RESTRICTION
Page 2-206
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
702 Toll Deny Table
Provides a way to make toll restriction(call barring) very easy and flexible. There are
500 entries allowed in the deny and each entry index can be assigned to a class of
service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the use of wild cards(MMC 704
Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built into toll restriction. Wild cards
can be used repeatedly in the dial string, limited only to what is allowed or denied in
MMC 704. There are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level A is set
as unrestricted by default and toll level H is set as in-house only by default.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Used to wild card X entered
B
Used to wild card Y entered
C
Used to wild card Z entered
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 702
Display shows
DENY(001):BCDEFG
2. Dial index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
DENY(005):BCDEFG
3. Enter toll pattern via dial keypad(e.g., 212)
DENY(005):BCDEFG
:000000
:000000
212
OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) from above list and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS
options
4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line
until under toll class mark(e.g., E)
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
:000000
DENY(005):BCDEFG
21X
:000000
DENY(001):BCDEFG
212
:000100
Page 2-207
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press
Right Soft button to store and return to step 1
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
Page 2-208
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
703 Toll Allowance Table
Provides a way to make toll restriction very easy and flexible. There are 250
allowable entries in the allow table for a OfficeServ 12 system and each entry index
can be assigned to a class of service. Each index can have up to 12 digits. With the
use of wild cards(MMC 704 Assign Wild Character), more flexibility can be built
into toll restriction. There are six toll levels, B to G, that are programmable. Toll level
A is set as unrestricted by default, and toll level H is set as in-house only by default.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Used to wild card X entered
B
Used to wild card Y entered
C
Used to wild card Z entered
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 702
Display shows
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
2. Dial index number.(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to select index and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
3. Enter toll pattern via dial keypad(e.g., 202)
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
:000000
:000000
202
OR
Enter wild card(e.g., 21X) from above list and
press Right Soft button to move cursor to COS
options
4. Press Volume button to move cursor along line
until under toll class mark(e.g., E)
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
:000000
ALOW(005):BCDEFG
20X
:000000
ALOW(001):BCDEFG
202
:000100
Page 2-209
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Enter a 1 for YES or 0 for NO and press
Right Soft button to store and return to step 1
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ENTRIES ARE SET TO 0
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
MMC 701 ASSIGN COS CONTENTS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 704 ASSIGN WILD CHARACTER
Page 2-210
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
704 Assign Wild Character
Provides flexibility to toll restriction(call barring) when a specific numbering plan is
so desired. There are only three entry tables but more than one digit can be assigned
per table if needed.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 704
Display shows
2. Press Volume button to select X, Y, or Z(e.g., Z)
and press Right Soft button to advance cursor to
option line
3. Press Volume button to move cursor to option
digit desired(e.g., 5) and enter 1(put under other
digits as required)
Press Left Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press Right Soft button to return to step 1
:0123456789*#
X:111111111111
:0123456789*#
Z:000000000000
:0123456789*#
Z:000001000000
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
X ENTRIES SET TO 1
OTHER ENTRIES SET TO 0
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-211
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
705 Assign System Speed Dial
Enables the assignment of system speed dialling numbers. There are up to 500 entries
available for programming(see MMC 606). Each speed dial number consists of a
trunk or trunk group access code followed by a separator and up to 24 digits to be
dialled. These dialled digits may consist of 0-9, and #. If the system recognises a
valid trunk or trunk group access number, it will automatically insert the separator.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
B
Used to insert a flash code ‘F’
C
Used to insert a pause code ‘P’
D
Used to insert a pulse/tone conversion code ‘C’
E
Used to mask/unmask following digits-shows as ‘ [’ or ‘]’
F
Used to enter name for speed dial bin(see MMC 706)
ANS/RLS
Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728
CID translation table.
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 705
Display shows
SYS SPEED DIAL
2. Dial speed index desired(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
SYS SPEED DIAL
3. Enter access code(e.g., 9/701) plus the phone
number up to 24 digits(digits will scroll under)
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2
SYS SPEED DIAL
4. Press F key to toggle to MMC 706 step 3 to
enter name
SYS SPEED NAME
Page 2-212
500:
505:
505:9–121223456789
505:
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
5. If you want to save the speed dial number and
name data to the MMC 728 CID translation
table, Press ANS/RLS button
and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial name must be exist)
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
SYS SPEED DIAL
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC 728 CLIP NAME TRANSLATION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-213
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
706 System Speed Dial By Name
Allows an 11-character name to be entered for each system speed dial location.
This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial
feature. The directory dial feature allows the display phone user to select a speed dial
location by scanning its name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing
a different key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is ‘SAM SMITH,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’.
Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message. Pressing A button changes the letter
from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
Page 2-214
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
TRANSFER Used to exit MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to save the speed dial number and name to the MMC 728
CID translation table.
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 706
Display shows
SYS SPEED NAME
500:
2. Dial system speed entry number(e.g., 505)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
SYS SPEED NAME
505:
3. Enter name using dial keypad and above table
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2
OR
Press the F key to toggle to speed dial number
to return to MMC 705, step 3
SYS SPEED NAME
505:TELECOMS
4. If you want to save the speed dial number and
name data to the MMC 728 CLI translation
table, Press ANS/RLS button
and dial 1 for YES.
(The speed dial number must be exist)
SYS SPEED NAME
ADD CLI XLT ?NO
SYS SPEED DIAL
505:
5. Press Right Soft button to return to step 2 above
OR
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NO NAMES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 606 ASSIGN SPEED BLOCK
MMC 705 ASSIGN SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 728 CLIP NAME TRANSLATION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-215
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
707 Authorization Code
Enables the authorization feature on a per-class of service selection. There are 100
available entries. Authorization codes can be up to 4 to 10 digits.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 707
Display shows
AUTHOR.CODE(001)
2. Dial code index number(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
3. Enter authorization code(minimum of four digits)
and a maximum of 10 digits via dial keypad
(e.g., 1234567890)
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
4. Enter class of service number 01-30(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to select COS and press
Right Soft button to select and return to step 2
AUTHOR.CODE(005)
C:01
C:01
1234567890
1234567890
C:01
C:05
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
Page 2-216
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
708 Account Code
Enables the account code entry feature. There are 200 available entries.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 708
Display shows
ACCOUNT CODE
2. Dial code index number(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
ACCOUNT CODE
3. Enter account code(maximum 12 digits) via
dial keypad(e.g., 1234)
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
back to step 2
ACCOUNT CODE
001:
005:
005:1234
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 305 ASSIGN FORCED CODE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-217
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
709 Toll Pass Code/Special Code Table
This MMC provides a means to program three trunk code tables as described below :
Code Type
PBX CODE
Description
This table contains up to five entries and is used to identify the trunk
access codes needed for toll restriction to be properly applied when the
system is used either behind a PBX or with CENTREX-supplied dial tone.
Toll restriction will only be applied on trunks flagged as PBX in MMC 401 if
a trunk access code entered in this table is dialled. Toll restriction will be
applied to the digits following the trunk access code.
SPECIAL CODE
This table identifies to the system dialling rules the special feature codes
used to activate central office custom calling features such as CID Block
and call waiting disable. The special feature codes can be used on a per
call basis without affecting LCR or toll restriction programming. There is a
maximum of ten(10) entries available each of which may be up to four
digits long.
TOLL OVERRIDE
This table of eight entries is used to identify to the system numbers that will
bypass all dialling restrictions. This bypass includes Toll restriction, Trunk
access and forced authorization or account codes. Each entry in the table
can be up to 14 digits long.
OVRD USE TRK GRP
This entry designates the trunk group that toll override calls will access.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 709
Display shows
PBX ACCESS CODE
2. Select PBX , SPECIAL CODE, TOLL
OVERRIDE or OVRD USE TRK GRP
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
TOLL OVERRIDE
Page 2-218
1:
1:
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Enter index number(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
TOLL OVERRIDE
4. Enter via dial keypad the desired access/
feature code(e.g., 911)
Press Right Soft button to enter and return
to step 3 and enter more entries
TOLL OVERRIDE
3:_
3:911
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 401 PBX TRUNK
MMC 702 TOLL DENY TABLE
MMC 703 TOLL ALLOWANCE TABLE
MMC 305 FORCED CODES
TOLL RESTRICTION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-219
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
710 LCR Digit Table
The LCR DIGIT TABLE contains all numerical digits for the completion of outgoing
call placement. This table works in conjunction with LCR ROUTE TABLE, LCR
TIME TABLE and LCR MODIFY DIGITS TABLE. There is a maximum 2000 with
a digit string length of 10 numerical digits. This system automatically maintains
entered digit strings in numerical order. The characters * and # are also accepted for
use with feature codes.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 710
Display shows
LCR DIGIT (0001)
2. Dial LCR entry(e.g., 0005)
OR
Press Volume button to select entry and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
LCR DIGIT (0005)
3. Enter LCR digit string via the dial keypad and
press Right Soft button
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 1
LCR DIGIT (0005)
4. Enter digit length(max : 31)
Cursor will move to RT(route selection)
LCR DIGIT
5. Enter RT(01-32)
Valid entry will return you to step 1
LCR DIGIT
DIGIT:
DIGIT:_
DIGIT:305426
(0005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01
(0005)
LENGTH:10 RT:01
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-220
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-221
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
711 LCR Time Table
This table gives the flexibility to the system, through the LCR ROUTES, to allow calls
placed at any given time of day to use the least cost trunk route that is available.
When LCR ROUTE ADVANCE is allowed, it is possible for calls to be placed on more
expensive trunks on any given time of day. There are four possible time entries per day ;
the start time of the next time period is the end time of the previous time period.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 711
Display shows
LCR TIME (SUN:A)
2. Dial day of week(SUN-SAT, e.g., WED)
OR
Press Volume button to make day selection and
press Right Soft button
LCR TIME (WED:A)
3. Dial time band(A-D, e.g., B)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button
LCR TIME (WED:B)
4. Dial time via keypad(24-hour format, e.g., 0800)
Cursor moves to LCRT(reference MMC 712)
LCR TIME (WED:B)
5. Dial time table number(1-4)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button
LCR TIME (WED:B)
HHMM:
HHMM:
HHMM:
LCRT:-
LCRT:-
LCRT:-
HHMM:0800 LCRT:-
HHMM:0800 LCRT:1
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-222
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-223
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
712 LCR Route Table
The LCR ROUTE TABLE is responsible for selecting a specific trunk group in the
completion of an outward bound call. This table works in conjunction with LCR
DIGIT TABLE, LCR TIME TABLE, LCR COS TABLE and LCR MODIFIED
DIGITS TABLE. After you dial a valid digit string, the system uses the LCR ROUTE
TABLE to select a specific predetermined trunk group. There is a maximum number
of 32 routes available. If more than one trunk group is available for call completion,
the system uses the first designated trunk group and then starts to utilise succeeding
trunk groups. If all trunk groups are busy in a selected route, call queue becomes
active and allocates trunks as they become available.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 712
Display shows
LCR ROUTE (01:1)
2. Dial LCR ROUTE table number(e.g., 05)
OR
Press Volume button to selected table and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
LCR ROUTE (05:1)
3. Dial TIME BAND index number 1-4(e.g., 2)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
4. Dial LCR COS number 1-8(e.g., 4)
OR
Press Volume button to selected COS and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
Page 2-224
C:1 G:NONE M:---
C:1 G:NONE M:---
C:1 G:NONE M:---
C:4 G:NONE M:---
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Dial TRUNK GROUP access code(e.g., 801)
OR
Press Volume button to selected access code and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
6. Dial MODIFY DIGITS index number(e.g., 050)
OR
Press Volume button to selected index number
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to step 2
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801
C:4 G:801
M:---
M:050
LCR ROUTE (05:2)
C:4 G:801
M:---
7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-225
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
713 LCR Modify Digit Table
This program entry is also referred to as Outgoing dial Rules. This will give the
system the ability to add or delete a digit string or singular digit if needed to complete
a call. A perfect example is the adding of a digit ‘1’ An advantage is to insert a
common carrier network access code of 1010288. With these digits inserted, a long
distance call will be placed over a local line utilizing the common carrier network.
The characters * and # can also be entered. There are 200 modify digit entries
available.
Option
Maximum Number of Digit Entries
Number of digits to delete
15
Insert(before dialling string)
14
Append(after dialling string)
14
DIGIT STRING KEY
Insert String+Digit String(delete)+Append String
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 713
Display shows
LCR MODIFY (001)
2. Enter index number(e.g., 005)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
LCR MODIFY (005)
3. Enter number of digits to delete
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step and move
cursor to next step
LCR MODIFY (005)
Page 2-226
NOF DEL DGT:00
NOF DEL DGT:00
NOF DEL DGT:01
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Enter digits to be inserted(e.g., 10288)
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and advance to next step
LCR MODIFY (005)
5. Enter digits to be appended(e.g., 45678)
OR
Press Right Soft button to skip step or to store
information and return to step 2
LCR MODIFY (005)
I:10288_
A:_
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-227
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
714 DID Number And Name Translation
Assigns an incoming DID call to a specific ring plan destination. It also provides a
call waiting option, if needed, so that a second incoming DID call can be received.
The table is also used to define which MOH source a caller to that DID number will
hear when placed on hold. An 11 character name can be added to the number.
There are a maximum of 999 entries. If there is no matching number on DID service
the call is routed to the operator group.
Definitions of option are as follows :
!
DGT : Digits to be received from Trunk line Up to 16 digits may be entered.
!
MOH SOURCE : Allows the technician to select what the calling party will
hear in regards to that DID/DNIS number if the call is placed on hold.
!
1 : XXX, 2 : XXX, 3 : XXX, 4 : XXX, 5 : XXX, 6 : XXX=ring plan and
destination during each ring plan. The destination can be a station, station
group, trunk or trunk group. If trunk or trunk group is selected the trunks must
be programmed as E&M trunks to allow the received digits to be re-sent on the
facility(s). This is referred to as DID Repeat digits over tie line.
An entry of the character ‘B’ means to repeat the received digits.
!
CW : Call waiting Yes/No . Allow a second DID call to be received
!
MC : The number of maximum call count. When this sets 99, this feature will
not works. When this sets 0, if a call comes that matched DID digits and DGT
field then the system will be reject call. When this sets between 1 to 98, if a call
comes that matched DID digits and DGT field then the system counts same DID
digits call, and in case of the count is same or higher than this value, the system
sends busy signal to caller.
!
DC : The number of digits to delete. This is useful with Tandem switching,
mixed numbering plans and DID Repeat digits over tie line. Maximum number
of digits that can be deleted is 16.
!
NAME : Input up to 11 characters to identify call.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing
the dial keypad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory
name is ‘SAM SMITH,’ press ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’. Press ‘2’ once to get
Page 2-228
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
‘A’. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message.
Pressing A button changes the letter from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 714
Display shows
DID DIGIT
2. Enter valid index number(e.g., 005) via dial
keypad
DID DIGIT
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
(001)
DGT:
(005)
DGT:
Page 2-229
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
3. Enter digits to be translated(e.g., 5065) via dial
keypad and press Right Soft button to move
cursor
DID DIGIT
4. Enter the MOH source for this entry.
OR
Press Volume button to select option and press
Right Soft button to return to step 3 above
DID DIGIT
5. Enter station or group number for each Ring
Plan destination via dial keypad.(e.g., 530)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
DID DIGIT
6. Enter call wait option via dial keypad.
(1 for YES, 0 for NO)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
7. Enter maximum call count via dial keypad.
(00-99)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance next step.
DID DIGIT
8. Enter number or delete digit via dial keypad.
(0-16)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance next step.
DID DIGIT
9. Enter the name via dial keypad and press Right
Soft button to return to step 1
DID DIGIT
(005)
DGT:5065
(005)
MOH SOURCE :NONE
1:530
(005)
2:
(005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
DID DIGIT
(005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
(005)
CW:N MC:99 DC:0
(005)
NAME:
10. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-230
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
Index
DIGIT
1-6
CW
MC
DC
NAME
001
2***
B
N
99
0
NONE
002
3***
B
N
99
0
NONE
003
5***
B
N
99
0
NONE
004
8***
B
N
99
0
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-231
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
715 Programmed Station Message
Allows custom messages to be programmed or default messages to be changed.
Messages are written via the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.
Pressing a different key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
message is ‘Sunbathing,’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter ‘S’.
Now press the number ‘8’ twice to get the letter ‘U’. Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message. Pressing the A button will change
the letter from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right or the Volume
Down button to move the cursor to the left. A space can be entered by using these
keys.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
There are 15 messages in the system.
MESSAGES 01-10 are 16 character pre-programmed default messages. Any of them
can be changed.
MESSAGES 11-15 are 16 character blank messages that can be created.
Page 2-232
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Toggles from upper case to lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 715
Display shows
PGM.MESSAGE (01)
GIVE ME THE CALL
2. Enter index number(e.g., 11)
OR
Press Volume button arrow to make selection
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
PGM.MESSAGE (11)
3. Enter message via dial keypad using the above
table(maximum 16 characters)
Use A button to toggle upper case/lower case
Press Right Soft button to return to step 2
PGM.MESSAGE (11)
SunBathing
_Blank Message
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
TEN PROGRAMMED MESSAGES AS DETAILED BELOW
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
09.
10.
GIVE ME THE CALL
TAKE A MESSAGE
ASK THEM TO HOLD
SEND TO MY VM
TRANSFER TO MY SECY
LEAVE A MESSAGE
PAGE ME
OUT OF TOWN
IN A MEETING
IWILL CALL BACK
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 115 SET PROGRAMMED MESSAGE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-233
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
716 UK LCR Options
This MMC provides U.K. LCR options as described below.
No
Option
Description
0
NETWORK CODE
This table is used to network access code when the call is routed to the
secondary network. This table contains up to 16 entries. Each code has
4 digits maximum in length and use option for None, CCC, PIN or
Both.(Default : all codes are empty and all use options are none)
0 NONE This code doesn’t use.
1
PIN CODE
1 CCC
This code uses with Call Cast Code(CCC).
2 PIN
This code uses with PIN Code.
3 BOTH
This code uses with PIN code and Call Cast Code.
This table is used to PIN code when the call is routed to the secondary
network. This table contains up to 4 entries and each code has 10 digits
maximum in length.(Default : all tables are empty)
2
CCC OPTION
This is used to which number used for Call Cost Code.
(Default : Station Number)
0 STATION NUMBER Station number uses for Call Cost Code.
1 NONE Doesn’t use Call Cost Code.
3
STATION PIN NO.
This is assigned to PIN code table number for each station number.
(Default : all stations are 1)
This MMC is available in Australia, New Zealand and U.K. only
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-234
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Moves cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 716
Display shows
NETWORK CODE
2. Enter option number(0-3) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
NETWORK CODE
3. Enter entry number(01-16) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
NETWORK CODE
4. Enter network access code via dial keypad
and press Right Soft button to move cursor
NETWORK CODE
5. Enter use option number(0-3) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
NETWORK CODE
01:
01:
01:
USE:NONE
USE:NONE
USE:NONE
01:1234 USE:NONE
01:1234 USE:CCC
6 Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 400 TENANT ON/OFF PER TRUNK
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 711 LCR TIME TABLE
MMC 712 LCR ROUTE TABLE
MMC 713 LCR MODIFY DIGIT TABLE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-235
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
718 MY Area Code
This MMC defines the home area code and country code. This information is used
for caller ID and ISDN calls in defining the area code on incoming calls. This MMC
removes the local area code to allow callback without digit modifications in LCR.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Moves cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 718
Display shows
MY AREA CODE
2. Enter 0 for COUNTRY or 1 for AREA.
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MY AREA CODE
3. Enter area code(maximum 4 digits) via dial
keypad(e.g., 2) and press Right Soft button to
move cursor back to step 2.
MY AREA CODE
AREA :
AREA :
AREA :2
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
TRUNK PROGRAMMING
Page 2-236
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
720 Copy Key Programming
Provides a tool for duplicating key assignment from one phone to another.
This can be done on a per-station basis or on all stations, but not on a group of
stations. One limitation is that the original and target phones must be of the same
type(e.g., same number of buttons).
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Moves cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ANS/RLS
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 720
Display shows
[201] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
2. Enter the station number to copy t(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button for select all station.
[205] COPY KEY
FROM:NONE
3. Enter station number to copy from(e.g., 203)
and cursor returns to step 2
OR
Press Volume buttons to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[205] COPY KEY
FROM:203
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-237
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
721 Save Station Key Programming
Provides a service tool which will minimize the accidental loss of programmable
buttons on the phones. The method of operation is simple, first the data is saved and
then the station can be replaced with another station type or the keys can be
reprogrammed to other features. Once testing or replacement is completed, the data
can be restored to the individual station, providing the same type is in place.
This program uses carefully. Because key programming data save to common key
programming database. When new phone connect, system copy from common key
programming database to new phone key programming database.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 721
Display shows
[201] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
2. Enter desired station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
[205] SAVE KEY
RESTORE
3. Press Volume button to make function selection
and press Right Soft button to enter and return to
step 2
[205] SAVE KEY
SAVE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Page 2-238
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
722 Station Key Programming
Allows the customizing of programmable buttons on specific electronic phones,
AOM, or 64 button module on the system. For phones, buttons 1 and 2 are set as
CALL buttons by default. For AOM’s and 64 button DSS box’s all buttons are set as
DS keys by default. Features are entered via dial keypad keys by pressing the dial
keypad number the required number of steps to select the feature. For example, for
OHVA, the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, press 2 for
the first letter B and then use the Volume button to change the selection from
BARGE to BOSS.
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT
1
2
3
DIAL 2
AB
BARGE
CAD
DIAL 3
DGPALM
EP
FAUTO
DIAL 4
GCONF
HDSET
IG
DIAL 5
LANREQ
LANREQ
LANREQ
DIAL 6
MMPA
NEW
OHVA
DIAL 7
PAGE
PAGE
REJECT
DIAL 8
TG
UA
VG
4
SETMG
Programmable button Assignments :
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
FEATURE : DESCRIPTION
AB : ABSENCE
ABAND : ABANDONED CALL
ACC : ACCOUNT
ALARM : ALARM
AN/RLS : ANSWER/RELEASE
BARGE : BARGE-IN
BLOCK : OHVA BLOCK
BOSS : BOSS/SECRETARY
CAD : CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY
CALL : CALL BUTTON
CAMP : STATION CAMP-ON
CANMG : MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK : CALLBACK
CHOICE : CHOICE(Related to News Server)
CLIP : CALLER ID
CONF : CONFERENCE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-239
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-240
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CONP : CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY
CS : CALL STATUS
CSNR : CALLER ID SAVE NUMBER REDIAL
DGPALM : EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION
DICT : DICTATION
DIR : DIRECTORY
DIVERT : EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY
DLOCK : DOOR LOCK
DND : DO NOT DISTURB
DNDO : DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE
DP : DIRECT PICKUP
DROP : CALL DROP
DS : DSS KEY
DT : DTS KEY
EP : ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP
EXTMIC : EXTERNAL MIC
FAUTO : FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH : FLASH
FWRD : CALL FORWARD
GCONF : GROUP CONFERENCE
GPIK : GROUP PICKUP
HDSET : HEADSET MODE
HLDPK : HOLD PICKUP
HOLD : HOLD
IG : IN/OUT GROUP
INFDSP : INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)
INQIRE : INQUIRE
ISPY : CID SPY
LANREQ : LAN REQUEST
LCR : LEAST COST ROUTING
LISTN : GROUP LISTENING
LNR : LAST NUMBER REDIAL
LOG : CALL LOGGING
MCID : MALICIOUS CALL ID
MMPA : MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MMPG : MEET ME PAGE
MS : MANUAL SIGNALING
MSG : MESSAGE
MUTE : MUTE
MW : MESSAGE WAIT
NEW : NEW CALL
NND : NAME NUMBER DATE
NOCLIP : NO CID SEND
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
NXT : CID NEXT
OHVA : OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPER : OPERATOR
PAGE : PAGE
PAGPK : PICKUP PAGE HOLD
PARK : CALL PARK ORBIT
PAUSE : PAUSE
PMSG : PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PRB : PRIVACY RELEASE AND BRIDGE
PTHR : PATH REPLACEMENT
REJECT : OHVA REJECT
RETRY : AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY
REVW : REVIEW
RP : RING PLAN
RTO : RING PLAN TIME OVERIDE
SETMG : SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SG : STATION GROUP
SNR : SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
SPD : SPEED DIAL
SPKR : SPEAKER
STATE : SET EXECUTIVE STATE
STORE : STORE DISPLAYED NUMBER
SYSALM : SYSTEM ALARMS
TG : TRUNK GROUP
TIMER : TIMER
TRARPT : TRAFFIC REPORT
TRSF : TRANSFER
UA : UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VM : VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVM-400)
VMADM : VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVM-400)
VMAME : ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVM-400)
VMMSG : VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVM-400)
VT : VOICEMAIL TRANSFER
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-241
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 722
Display shows
[201] KEY (MAST)
2. Enter selected station number(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select station and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
[205] KEY (MAST)
3. Enter selected key number(e.g., 18)
OR
Press Volume button to select key number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[201] KEY (MAST)
4. Using above chart, press dial keypad key number
to make selection
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor to step 5 to
enter extender if required or to
return to step 2
[201] KEY PROG.
5. If required, enter extender(e.g.,03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
[201] KEY PROG.
01:CALL1"
01:CALL1"
18:NONE"_
18:NONE"GPIK_
18:NONE"GPIK03
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGTRAMMING
Page 2-242
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
723 System Key Programming
This MMC is much like MMC 722, Station Key Programming. The main difference
is that this MMC is system-wide rather than on a per-station basis. Features are
entered via the dial keypad by pressing numbers as shown in the table. For example,
for OHVA the number 6 is pressed three times. If the BOSS key is required, press 2
for the first letter B, and then use the Volume button to change selection from
BARGE to BOSS.
TYPE OF PHONE
00 : 24 BTN SETS
01 : 12 BTN SETS
03 : 6 BTN SETS
05 : 48/64B AOMS
06 : 20 BTN SETS
07 : 28 BTN SETS
08 : 18 BTN SETS
09 : 8 BTN SETS
10 : 99 BTN SETS
11 : 38 BTN SETS
12 : 21 BTN SETS
13 : 14 BTN SETS
DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT
1
2
3
DIAL 2
AB
BARGE
CAD
DIAL 3
DGPALM
EP
FAUTO
DIAL 4
GCONF
HDSET
IG
DIAL 5
LANREQ
LANREQ
LANREQ
DIAL 6
MMPA
NEW
OHVA
DIAL 7
PAGE
PAGE
REJECT
DIAL 8
TG
UA
VG
4
SETMG
See Programmable button Assignments on MMC 722.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-243
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 723
Display shows
TYPE:24 BTN SETS
01:CALL1"
2. Enter type of set via dial keypad(e.g.,1)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
01:CALL1"
3. Enter key number(e.g., 03)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:NONE"
4. Using table above, press dial keypad number
to make selection
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to advance cursor to step
5 to enter extender, if required
OR
Press Left Soft button to return to step 3
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:NONE"GPIK
5. If required, enter extender(e.g.,03)
OR Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to return to step 2
TYPE:12 BTN SETS
03:GPIK"GPIK03
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 720 COPY KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 721 SAVE STATION KEY PROGTRAMMING
Page 2-244
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
724 Dial Numbering Plan
This MMC allows the technician to change directory numbers for stations, trunks,
station groups, trunk groups and feature access codes. The system can be preprogrammed with a default three or four digit numbering for station, station groups
and trunk numbers depending on the position of the DIP switches. There is an error
message provided to prevent the accidental duplication of a directory number or
feature access code.
No
00
Number Type
STN DIAL NO.
Description
This is where station directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default : 201-2xx, 3xx or 2001-2xxx
01
TRK DIAL NO.
This is where trunk directory numbers are changed or assigned.
Default : 701-7xx or 7001-7xxx
02
MISC DIAL NO.
This is where directory numbers for relays, MOH ports and the alarm
sensor are changed or assigned.
Default : Internal CHIME : 371
Internal MODEM : 3999
External MOH : 372-377
External PAGE & Relay : 361-369
Common Bell Relay : 3991-3993
Loud Bell Relay : 3995-3997
03
04
05
STNG DIAL
This is where station group numbers are changed or assigned.
NUMBER
Default : 500-5xx or 5001-5xxx
TRKG DIAL
This is where trunk group numbers are changed or assigned.
NUMBER
Default : The first is 9 or 0, 800-828
FEAT DIAL
This is where feature access codes are changed or assigned.
NUMBER
Dialling codes are entered via the dial keypad key by pressing the
dial keypad number the required steps to select the feature. For
example, for OHVA, the number 6 would be pressed three times.
NOTE) Please remember that this program is system-wide.
06
S0 STN DIAL NO.
This is where directory numbers for BRI station ports mapping
terminal number.
Default : 8701-8748
07
NTWK LCR DIAL
This is where additional LCR access codes are entered in the case
NO
when two or more OfficeServ 12 system are networked together.
Default : NONE
08
VIRT EXT DIAL NO
This is where virtual station directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default : SLT : 3501-3546, DGP : 3401-3480
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-245
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
No
09
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Number Type
Description
MGI DIAL NO.
This is where MGI port directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default : 3801-38xx
10
IP STN DIAL NO.
This is where IP-based station directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default : 3201-3299
11
MOBILE DIAL NO.
This is where wireless IP-based station directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default : 3301-3348
12
VOIP NET DIAL NO
This is where Samsung proprietary switch-to-switch VoIP
networking trunk signalling port directory numbers are changed or
assigned.
Default : 8301-8380
13
H323 TRK DIAL NO
This is where VoIP H.323 trunk signalling port directory numbers
are changed or assigned.
Default : 8401-8480
14
SIP TRK DIAL NO
This is where VoIP SIP trunk signalling port directory numbers are
changed or assigned.
Default : 8501-8580
FEATURE NUMBERING DIAL KEYPAD
COUNT
Page 2-246
1
2
3
DIAL 2
ABAND
BARGE
CAMP
DIAL 3
DGPALM
DGPALM
FAUTO
DIAL 4
GCONF
HDSET
IG
DIAL 5
LCR
LCR
LCR
DIAL 6
MMPA
NEW
OHVA
DIAL 7
PAGE
PAGE
REJECT
DIAL 8
UA
UA
VMSCMT
DIAL 9
WCOS
WCOS
WCOS
4
SELFID
WCOS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
FEATURE CODE ASSIGNMENTS AND DEFAULT
Feature
Default
Description
ABAND
64
ABANDONED CALL
ABS
NONE
ABSENCE
ACCT
47
ACCOUNT
ALMCLR
57
ALARM
AUTH
*
AUTHORIZATION CODE
BARGE
NONE
BARGE-IN
BLOCK
NONE
OHVA BLOCK
BOSS
NONE
BOSS/SECRETARY
CAMP
45
STATION CAMP-ON
CANMG
42
MESSAGE CANCEL
CBK
44
CALLBACK
CHOICE
NONE
CHOICE(Related to News Server)
CONF
46
CONFERENCE
CONP
NONE
CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY
CR
NONE
CALL RECORD (Requires SVM-400)
DGPALM
NONE
EASY ALARM SET TO REMOTE STATION
DICT
NONE
DICTATION
DIR
NONE
DIRECTORY
DIRPK
65
DIRECT PICKUP
DISALM
58
DISA ALARM CLEAR
DIVERT
NONE
EXECUTIVE CALL DIVERT TO SECRETARY
DLOCK
13
DOOR UNLOCK
DND
40
DO NOT DISTURB
DNDO
NONE
DO NOT DISTURB OVERRIDE
FAUTO
14
FORCED AUTO ANSWER
FLASH
49
FLASH
FWD
60
CALL FORWARD
GCONF
NONE
GROUP CONFERENCE
GRPK
66
GROUP PICKUP
HDSET
NONE
HEADSET MODE
HLDPK
12
HOLD PICKUP
HOLD
11
HOLD
IG
NONE
IN/OUT GROUP
INFDSP
NONE
INFORMATION DISPLAY(Requires News/Call Plus)
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-247
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Feature
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Default
Description
LCR
NONE
LEAST COST ROUTING
LISTN
NONE
GROUP LISTENING
LNR
19
LAST NUMBER REDIAL
LOG
NONE
CALL LOGGING
MCID
NONE
MALICIOUS CALL ID
MMPA
56
MEET ME PAGE ANSWER
MMPG
54
MEET ME PAGE
MSG
43
MESSAGE
MYGRPK
NONE
MY PICKUP GROUP CALL PICKUP
NEW
NONE
NEW CALL
NOCLIP
NONE
NO CID SEND
OHVA
NONE
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE
OPER
0
OPERATOR
PAGE
55
PAGE
PAGPK
10
PICKUP PAGE HOLD
PARK
NONE
CALL PARK ORBIT
PMSG
48
PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGE
PTHR
NONE
PATH REPLACEMENT
REJECT
NONE
OHVA REJECT
RP
NONE
RING PLAN
RTO
NONE
RING PLAN TIME OVERIDE
SELPID
NONE
SELF SYSTEM ID
SETMG
41
SET MESSAGE W/O RING
SG
NONE
STATION GROUP
SLTALM
18
EASY ALARM SET TO SELF STATION
SLTMMC
15
NORMAL PHONE PROGRAMMING
SNR
17
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
SPEED
16
SPEED DIAL
SRELOC
NONE
SET RELOCATION
STATE
NONE
SET EXECUTIVE STATE
UA
67
UNIVERSAL ANSWER
VMADM
NONE
VOICE MAIL ADMINISTRATION(Requires SVM-400)
VMAME
NONE
ANSWER MACHINE EMULATION(Requires SVM-400)
VMMEMO
#
VOICE MAIL MEMO(Requires SVM-400)
VMMSG
NONE
VOICE MAIL MESSAGE KEY(Requires SVM-400)
WCOS
59
WORKING CLASS OF SERVICE
Page 2-248
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button
Display shows
STN DIAL NUM:C1
2. Dial option number to make selection(e. g., 06)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to advance cursor
FEAT DIAL NUMBER
3. Dial first letter of feature name(e.g., 7)
AND
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
Press Volume button to make selection then
press Right Soft button to advance cursor
4. Enter digits(e.g., 63) via the dial keypad
DLI-01:201"
ABAND :64"_
PAGE :55"
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE"_
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE"63
5. Press Right Soft button to enter change and
continue to make changes
If an error message appears indicating
duplication of access code, enter 1 for YES for
change or enter 0 for NO for no change
FEAT NUMBER PLAN
PARK :NONE"63
SAME DIAL EXIST
CHANGE? Y:1,N:0
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
FEATURE CODES ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
ALL
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-249
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
725 SMDR Options
Allows the system administrator to select the information printed on the SMDR
report. The following options may be selected to print on SMDR :
No
00
Option
PAGE HEADER
Default
YES
Description
This option determines whether a page header will print
at the top of each page. This would normally be turned off
if SMDR is being sent to a Call Accounting machine.
01
LINE PER PAGE
60
This option selects the length of each page to determine
when to print the SMDR header. The number of lines may
be in the range 01-99.
02
INCOMING CALL
NO
This option determines whether incoming calls will print
on SMDR.
03
OUTGOING CALL
YES
This option determines whether outgoing calls will print
on SMDR.
04
AUTHORIZE
NO
CODE
This option determines whether authorization codes will
print on SMDR. If this option is set to NO, system make
AUTH field to ‘****’ on SMDR.
05
SMDR START
YES
TIME
06
IN/OUT GROUP
This option determines whether valid calls will include the
minimum call time in total call duration.
NO
This option allows a message, IN GROUP or OUT
GROUP, to be printed in the digits dialled column each
time a station enters or leaves a group.
07
DND CALL
NO
This option allows a message, IN DND or OUT DND, to
be printed in the digits dialled column each time a station
enters or leaves DND.
08
WAKE-UP CALL
YES
This option determines whether stations receiving an
alarm reminder call will print on SMDR.
09
DIRECTORY
NONE
NAME
10
CALLER ID DATA
This option allows the system administrator to enter a 16
character name which will appear on the SMDR header.
YES
This option can be selected to print Caller ID data
received from the Central Office on incoming calls.
This option requires the use of a 132 column(wide carriage)
printer or an 80 column printer set for condensed print.
11
ABANDON CALL
YES
If this option is set to YES, unanswered calls for which
CID information was received will print on SMDR.
13
NO. OF DIAL
MASK
0
If this option is set to a numeric value, the selected last
digits of the number dialled field will be masked as
asterisks (*) on the SMDR print out. Maximum masked
digits is 18. First 4 digits will not mask.
Page 2-250
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
Option
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Default
15
INCOMING
16
INTERCOM CALL
Description
NO
If this option is set to YES, the duration of calls ringing
ANSWER
before answered will print on SMDR.
NO
This option determines whether intercom calls will print
on SMDR.
17
KEY MMC IN/OUT
NO
If set to YES then the SMDR record will show programming
being opened and closed in MMC 200 and MMC 800.
23
DID NUM/NAME
YES
If this option is set to YES, received DID information will
print on SMDR.
24
ITP
NO
If set to YES then the SMDR record will show IP-based
REGISTRATION
25
station to system connect and disconnect.
SET RELOCATION
NO
If set to YES then the SMDR record will show set
relocated information.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key selects a character. Pressing the next
key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name is SAM
SMITH, press the number 7 four times to get the letter S. Now press the number 2 once to get
the letter A. Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message.
Pressing A button changes the letter from upper case to lower case.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the Right Soft button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-251
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 725
Display shows
PAGE HEADER
2. Dial the option number(e.g., 01)
OR
Use the Volume buttons to scroll through
the options and press the Right Soft button
to select an option
LINE PER PAGE
3. Enter the option data.
OR
LINE PER PAGE
Use the Volume buttons to press the RIGHT
Soft button to save the data and return to step 2
PRINT: YES
60 LINE/PAGE
50 LINE/PAGE
LINE PER PAGE
50 LINE/PAGE
4. press TRANSFER to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 300 CUSTOMER ON/OFF PER STATION
Page 2-252
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
726 VM/AA Options
This MMC is used to define all the in band DTMF codes sent to voice mail ports.
These in band codes can be 0-9, A, B or C, and performed two functions.
CALL AND TYPE INFORMATION
This is a DTMF signaling string sent to a voice mail port when the voice mail port
answers a call. This DTMF information tells the voice mail port what type of call it is
receiving and where the call is coming from. e.g., call has forwarded from extension 225
CALL PROGRESS TONES
These are sent to the voice mail system to provide information about the progress of
the call. e.g., ring back, busy or disconnect.
Most Voice Mail systems can utilize DTMF in band signaling for more efficient call
processing. This MMC has many parameters that can be programmed according to
the type of automated attendant and/or voice mail system connected.
CALL and TYPE INFORMATION
The format of the DTMF data sent to a VM/AA port is as follows :
[CALL TYPE] + [DN1] + [SEPARATOR] + [DN2]
an example of this would be
[FORWARD ALL ] from [ 225 ] on trunk [ 703 ]
Each field can be programmed individually as follows :
EXTENSION FOR DN1 : If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a station is
ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will
not send station data in the DN1 field.(Default : No)
TRUNK FOR DN1 : If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the system will send data in the DN1 field indicating that a trunk is
ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will
not send trunk data in the DN1 field.(Default : No)
EXTENSION FOR DN2 : If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating
station of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will
not send station data in the DN2 field.(Default : No)
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-253
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
TRUNK FOR DN2 : If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the system will send data in the DN2 field indicating the originating
trunk of the call ringing the VMAA port.
If set to no, when the voice mail auto attendant system answers a call the system will
not send trunk data in the DN2 field.(Default : No)
SEPARATOR : When both DN1 and DN2 are used, a digit defined here is sent
between DN1 and DN2 so the VMAA system can determine where DN 1 stops and
where DN 2 starts. The separator can be DTMF 0 through 9, *, #, A, B or C. (Default
: No)
DISCONNECT SIGNAL : This is the call progress digit sent to the VMAA port in
place of a disconnect open. The digit defined here is sent three times.(Default : C)
CALLER ID NUMBER : If set to yes, when the voice mail auto attendant system
answers a call the system will send Caller ID data as DTMF tones to the VMAA port.
(Default : No)
CALL TYPE ID : This is the DTMF digit that is sent first in the in band digit string
and can identify any of the following call types :
No
0
Call Type
DIRECT CALL
Default
Description
1
A call originating directly from another station in the
system.
1
ALL FWD CALL
2
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the
VM/AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD
ALL set.
2
BSY FWD CALL
3
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the
VM/AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD
BUSY set.
3
NOA FWD CALL
4
This indicates that a call was forwarded to the
VM/AA port from a station with CALL FORWARD
NO ANSWER set.
4
RECALL
5
A call is recalling the VM/AA port after being
transferred and not answered.
5
DIR TRK CALL
6
6
OVERFLOW
7
A Trunk Line call has gone directly to VM/AA
(e.g., trunk 717 DIL to VM/AA).
A call has OVERFLOWED to the VM/AA port from a
station group.
7
DID CALL
8
A DID call has called the VM/AA port.
8
MESSAGE CALL
9
A message button or message reply feature code
has been used to call the VM/AA port.
Page 2-254
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRESS TONE ID : These are the DTMF codes that is sent to the VMAA port
in place of regular progress tones. For example, when a VMAA port goes off hook to
originate or transfer a call, instead of hearing normal dial tone, it will hear DTMF
‘BA’. Progress tones can greatly increase the efficiency of a VMAA system because
it is easier and quicker to detect DTMF than a busy, ring back or DND tone.
Progress tones can identify any of the following :
No
Tone Type
Default
Description
0
DIAL TONE
NO
Dial Tone
1
BUSY TONE
NO
Busy Tone
2
RINGBAK TONE
NO
Ring back Tone
3
DND NO MORE
NO
DND or No More Call Button Error
4
HDSET ANSWER
NO
Off Hook Answer
5
SPKER ANSWER
NO
On Hook Answer
GENERAL RULES
1. 201 is talking to a trunk and presses TRANSFER plus the station number, but the
station is forwarded to VM/AA and VM/AA answers. When this happens, if 201
presses TRANSFER again to return to the trunk, the VM/AA port is not on hold.
It is disconnected.
2. A VM/AA port leaves a message indication for a station. When the station returns
the message, any available port in the VM/AA group should ring, not only the
one that left the message.
3. A VM/AA port leaves a message for a station. When the station returns the
message, the MESSAGE LED is not automatically turned off. If a VM/AA
system turns on the MESSAGE LED, the VM/AA system must turn it off.
4. If DTMF call progress tones are not enabled, the system sends regular call
progress tones.
5. When a VM/AA port calls a station that is in the AUTO ANSWER or VOICE
ANNOUNCE mode, the phone will be forced to ring.
6. All calls to a VM/AA port or group ring with Trunk line ringing cadence, not
intercom ring cadence.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-255
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
EXAMPLES OF VM/AA OPERATION(IN BAND DTMF DIGIT STRING)
In the following example, all call and type data is turned on unless otherwise stated.
X is the separator digit, all-default values are used in these examples and [ ] is not
used.
A DIL 701 calls a VM/AA port or group :
[ * ]+[701]+[ ]+[ ]
In the above example, if Trunk Line information is not used :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is used)
DIL 701 calls a call-forwarded station(205) :
[ # ]+[205]+[ X ]+[701]
In the above example, if forward information is not used :
[ ]+[205] +[ X ]+[701]
In the above example, if forward and DN2/Trunk Line information is not used :
[ ]+[205]+[ ]+[ ]
DIL 701 calls group 501 that overflows to VM/AA :
[ # ]+[501]+[x]+[701]
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A DID call rings the VM/AA directly :
[ B ]+[9999]+[ ]+[ ]
9999 are the DID digits from Trunk Line
In the above example, if did information is turned off :
[ ]+[9999]+[ ]+[ ]
A station transfers(blind or screened) a call(Trunk Line, DID or intercom) to VM/AA
group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer) :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a station(225) that is Call Forward
All to a VM/AA group or port. When the transferring station hangs up(blind transfer)
and the VM/AA group or port answers :
[ # ]+[225]+[x]+[702]
Page 2-256
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
A station(202) transfers a Trunk Line call(702) to a group(501) that overflows to a
VM/AA group or port :
[ # ]+[501]+[ X ]+[702]
In the above example, if overflow information is turned off :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A station(205) calls a VM/AA port or group :
[ Q ]+[205]+[ ]+[ ]
In the above example, if direct information is turned off :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A station(205) calls using MESSAGE key :
[ Q ]+[205]+[ ]+[ ]
In the above example, if message information is turned off :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
A call(702) recalls back from station 225 to the VM/AA group :
[ # ]+[225]+[x]+[702]
In the above example, if recall and DN2/CO information are turned off :
[ ]+[ ]+[ ]+[ ] (Nothing is sent)
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used in some fields where a value is entered or deleted.
A
Used to input alpha character ‘A’
B
Used to insert alpha character ‘B’
C
Used
to
insert
alpha
character
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
‘C’
Page 2-257
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 726
Display shows
EXT FOR DN1
2. Enter the OPTION number from the above
list(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
TRK FOR DN2
3. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press Volume button for selection and press Right
Soft button to return to step 2
TRK FOR DN2
YES
NO
YES
4. press Transfer button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
SOME OPTIONS ARE DEPEND ON COUNTRY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 207 ASSIGN VM/AA PORT
Page 2-258
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
727 System Version Display
This MMC is only used for system version display. This is a READ ONLY MMC.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 727
Display shows
SYSTEM VERSION
‘03.08.22 V1.00
2. Press Transfer button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-259
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
728 CID Translation Table
Allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID number received
from the central office with a name programmed in this translation table. If there is
no match between a received number and a name in this table, ‘no CID name’ will be
displayed.
The translation table consists of 1000 entries for a OfficeServ 12 system . Each entry
is comprised of a ten-digit(14 digits allowed) telephone number and a 16-digit name.
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.
Pressing the next key will move the cursor to the next position. For example, if the
directory name is ‘SAM SMITH, ’ press the number ‘7’ four times to get the letter
‘S’. Now press the number ‘2’ once to get the letter ‘A’. Continue selecting characters
from the table below to complete your message.
When the character you want appears on the same dial keypad key as the previous
character, press the VOL Volume Up button to move the cursor to the right.
Count
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0
<
>
.
)
0
DIAL 1
Space
?
,
!
1
DIAL 2
A
B
C
@
2
DIAL 3
D
E
F
#
3
DIAL 4
G
H
I
$
4
DIAL 5
J
K
L
%
5
DIAL 6
M
N
O
^
6
DIAL 7
P
Q
R
S
7
DIAL 8
T
U
V
*
8
DIAL 9
W
X
Y
Z
9
DIAL *
:
=
[
]
*
The # button can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., ,,
%, $, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;,", ",` , and \.
Page 2-260
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
A
Acts as toggle between upper case and lower case
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 728
Display shows first entry
TRANSLATIO(0001)
2. Dial entry number(e.g., 0005)
OR
Use Volume button to scroll through entries
and press Right Soft button to select entry
TRANSLATIO(0005)
3. Enter telephone number and press Right Soft
button to advance name entry
OR
Enter telephone number and press Left
Soft button to return to step 2
TRANSLATIO(0005)
4. Enter associated name as described above
and press Right Soft button to return to step 2
TRANSLATIO(0005)
DGT:
DGT:_
DGT:3054264100
SAMSUNG TELECOM
5. press Transfer button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to exit and advance to next
MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 312 ALLOW CID
MMC 608 ASSIGN REVIEW BLOCKS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-261
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
740 Station Pair
Assigns a secondary station to a phone. This secondary station can be a phone or
single line port. The secondary station assumes the Call Forwarding, Class of
Service, LCR Class, and DND attributes of the primary station.
If the COS is changed for either station in MMC 301 the change affects both stations.
Secondary stations when dialled will also ring the primary extension. Message from
secondary extension will display that(secondary) extension numbers. Callback to
extension(secondary) as well.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 740
Display shows
[201] PRIMARY
2. Enter the primary station number via dial
keypad(e.g., 201)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft
button
[201] PRIMARY
3. Enter the secondary station number via dial
keypad(e.g., 205)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press Right Soft
button
[201] PRIMARY
SECONDARY:NONE
SECONDARY:NONE
SECONDARY:205
4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-262
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 102 STATION FORWARDING
MMC 301 STATION COS
MMC 310 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-263
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
750 VM System Restart
This MMC is only used for the external Samsung Voice Mail system(SVM-400).
When VMS starts or restarts it while download information about the OfficeServ 12
system it is installed.
This information is used by VMS to build a mailbox database.
This is quick way to initially configure a system, but is usually not necessary on
subsequent restarts. This
MMC can be used to turn on or off this database download and optionally restart the
VMS.
!
DOWNLOAD
NO-The database information will not be downloaded from keyphone system.
YES-The database information will be downloaded from keyphone system.
After VMS has been initially configured, it is advisable to set this to NO to
minimize boot up time.
!
PORT RESTART
NO-The VMS will not restart.
YES-The VMS will restart according to the DOWNLOAD option.
This option can be used at any time to reset the external VMS(SVM-400).
!
VIRTUAL NUMBER DOWNLOAD
This option is determine which type virtual port include during mailbox and
system numbering plan downloading procedure.
The virtual port type are followed :
No
Page 2-264
Port Type
Description
0
VIRTUAL EXT
Virtual extension number
1
IP PHONE
IP-based phone number
2
DECT PHONE
DECT terminal number
3
WIP WITH WLI
Wireless IP-based mobile phone number works with WLI
4
BRI STATION
ISDN terminal number
5
VOIP NET TRK
VoIP networking trunk number
6
VOIP 323 TRK
VoIP H.323 trunk number
7
VOIP SIP TRK
VoIP SIP trunk number
8
REMOTE STN
Remote station number via networking
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Changes MMC data between YES and NO
0 and 1 will change data and advance to other option
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 750
Display shows
VM CARD RESTART
2. Dial 0,1 or 2 to set option and advance
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
VM CARD RESTART
3. Dial 0(No) or 1(Yes) to confirm selection
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button
VM CARD RESTART
DOWNLOAD
? NO
CARD RESTART?NO
ARE YOU SURE?NO
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL OPTIONS ARE NO
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-265
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
751 Assign Mailbox
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System(SVM-400). It assigns
each station or group as having a mailbox(yes or no). When stations or groups are
flagged as YES, during Voice Mail System power up mailboxes will be created for
each directory number with a ‘YES’ entry.
Once the Voice Mail database has been created new boxes can be added.
a) Through Voice Mail administration,
b) By adding a new mailbox in this system and cycling system power.
If a mailbox is to be removed it must be done through Voice Mail administration.
If a station that do not have an associated voice mailbox, call the Voice Mail
system they will be answered by the Voice Mail system main greeting.
Mailboxes that are needed for people that do not have an extension must be added
through Voice Mail programming.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
ANS/RLS
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to select ALL
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 751
Display shows
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
2. Dial station number
OR
Press Volume button to scroll the number and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
3. Dial 0 for NO or 1 for YES.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and move stop 2.
ASSIGN MAIL BOX
Page 2-266
[201]
[202]
[202]
YES
YES
NO
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL STATIONS=YES
ALL GROUPS=NO
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-267
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
752 Auto Record
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System(SVM-400).
Some specific station in the phone system can be assigned to automatically record
conversations. When this option is set, all incoming, all outgoing, or all calls
(incoming or outgoing) can be recorded.
When this option is selected a specific port can be assigned for each station set to
automatic conversation recording or the effectiveness of this feature cannot be
guaranteed. In this MMC you can assign:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Which station uses this feature. -Station number
What mailbox the conversation is recorded in. -Mailbox number
What type of conversations are recorded, in, out or both. -I, O or B
What port is dedicated to the station. -Voice mail port number
A maximum of 4 stations can this feature in the OfficeServ 12.
The same port cannot be assigned to more than one station. Attempts to do this will
result in an error message.
When a Voice Mail port is assigned here, it is automatically removed from the Voice
Mail group defined in MMC 601.
Before using this feature make sure that you are not violating any state or federal
laws. Some states require that the recorded party be notified. SAMSUNG is not
responsible for any illegal use of this feature.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-268
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor left and right
Used to advance next MMC
Used to delete an entry
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 752
Display shows
AUTO RECORD
2. Dial station number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTO RECORD
3. Dial mailbox number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTO RECORD
4. Dial VM number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTO RECORD
5. Dial call type via dial keypad.
(0 : I, 1 : O or 2 : B)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTO RECORD
STN:201
STN:201
STN:201
PORT:209
PORT:209
MB:NONE
MB:NONE
MB:201
CALL:I
CALL:B
6. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-269
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
753 Warning Destination
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System. This MMC provides an
emergency destination for calls destined for the Voice Mail System, if the Voice Mail
System is removed or is offline. In addition any calls that are forwarded to the Voice
Mail card will not forward, they will remain ringing at the 'fwd from' station until
answered. This destination can be a station number or a group number.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
Used to delete an entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 753
Display shows
WARNING DEST.
2. Dial station number or group number
OR
Press Volume button to scroll the number.
WARNING DEST.
DEST:500
DEST:501
3. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
500
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-270
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
754 VM Halt
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System.
This MMC is used to halt the Voice Mail System(take it offline). It ensures that there
is no traffic on the Voice Mail card when it is disconnected from the system.
This operation should be disconnecting the voice mail system from the OfficeServ 12
system.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 754
Display shows
VM HALT
2. Enter 1 to halt or 0 to process
OR
Press Volume button to scroll the selections.
VM HALT
3. When you select 1 to halt, display shows :
Press 1 to confirm.
VM HALT
4. Display shows :
VM HALT
STATUS:PROC
STATUS:PROC
ARE YOU SURE?YES
STATUS:HALT
5. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
PROC
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-271
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
755 VM Alarm
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System(SVM-400).
This MMC will generate an alarm message in the mailbox defined in MMC 751
whenever the Voice Mail disk drive reaches a threshold.
The threshold is measured in % full. This means that if the MMC is set for 80, the
alarm will be generated when the disk exceeds 80 % of the available drive space.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 755
Display shows
2. Enter new threshold level.
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:80
VM ALARM
THRESHOLD:75
3. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
80 %
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-272
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
756 Assign VM MOH
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System(SVM-400).
This MMC is used to assign the Music on Hold source for the DCS-408/408i from a
sound file located on the SVM-400 hard disk drive. The 100 available sound files are
defined as numbers 5000 to 5099.
Basically SVM-400 supports various music for numbers 5000 to 5099. If you want to
use default SVM-400 support music, select the number. Otherwise, make sure you
record the sound file first. The next step is to assign the sound file to a SVM-400 port.
For example, if you record sound file 5025 you would associate 25 with a specific
SVM-400 port, e.g. 201. This will dedicate the port for use only as MOH and remove it
from group. Now 201 will show up as a valid music source in MMC 308, 309 and 408.
Each Music on Hold source assigned here requires one SVM-400 port.
If the first SVM-400 port is used for VMMOH, it must be disabled before boot up since
SVM-400 and the OfficeServ 12 use port 1 during boot up to exchange critical
information. For this reason we suggest you use the last port as VMMOH ports.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
Used to delete an entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 756
Display shows
SET VMMOH
2. Dial VM number
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
SET VMMOH
3. Enter VM message number
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
SET VMMOH
209
215
215
: NOT USE
: NOT USE
: 25
4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-273
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NOT USE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-274
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
757 VM In/Out
This MMC is only used for the Samsung Voice Mail System(SVM-400).
This MMC is used to assign each Voice Mail Port as used for incoming, outgoing or
both way calls. Note that this MMC must support outgoing calls if off premises
notification(beeper, outbound follow me of outbound notification) is used.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 757
Display shows
VM IN/OUT
2. Dial VM number
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
VM IN/OUT
3. Enter In or Out via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make a selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
VM IN/OUT
209
215
215
: IN/OUT
: IN/OUT
: IN
4. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
IN/OUT
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-275
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
800 Enable Technician Program
Used to open and close technician-level programming. If programming is not opened
and an attempt is made to access a system MMC, the error message will be
displayed.
A four digit passcode is required to access this MMC. Each character can be digits
0-9. When opened, this MMC enables access to all MMCs.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 800
Display shows
ENABLE TECH.PROG
2. Enter passcode
ENABLE TECH.PROG
PASSCODE:
PASSCODE:∗∗∗∗
Correct code shows
ENABLE TECH.PROG
DISABLE TENANT:1
Incorrect code shows
ENABLE TECH. PROG
PASSCODE ERROR
3. Enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable
OR
Press Volume button to select and press RIGHT
Soft button to move tenant number and enter
tenant number(1-2)
ENABLE TECH.PROG
4. Press Speaker button to advance MMC entry
level
801:TEC.PASSCODE
5. Enter the MMC desired(e.g., 209)
209:AOM MASTER
ENABLE TENANT:1
SELECT PROG.ID
AOM NOT EXIST
Page 2-276
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
6. To log out and return to MMC 800, press
Volume button to select DISABLE
OR
Press Speaker button then TRANSFER to return
to normal display
Programming option will time out
DEFAULT DATA
DISABLE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 801 CHANGE TECHNICIAN PASSCODE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-277
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
801 Change Technician Passcode
Used to change the passcode which allows access to MMC 800 Enable Technician
Program from its current value.
The passcode is four characters long. Each character can be digits 0-9. The current
or old passcode is required for this MMC.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to enter passcodes
Save data and advance to next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 801
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:_
2. Enter new passcode
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗
3. Enter new passcode again
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY
4. If passcode is correct, press RIGHT soft
key to continue and enter desired MMC
If passcode is incorrect
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY
:SUCCESS
TECH. PASSCODE
VERIFY
System returns to step 2
:∗∗∗∗
:FAILURE
TECH. PASSCODE
NEW CODE:∗∗∗∗
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
DEFAULT PASSCODE : 4321
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 800 ENABLE TECHNICIAN PROGRAM
Page 2-278
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
802 Customer Access MMC Number
Allows the System Administrator to have access to certain MMCs. For example,
it is required that the System Administrator customer have access to MMC 102 Call
Forward for call forwarding but it is not required that the System Administrator have
access to MMC 710 LCR Digit Table for LCR dial plans. This MMC is for both
tenants.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 802
Display shows
CUST.USE MMC :1
100:STN LOCK:YES
2. Enter desired tenant number(1-2) via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MMC TENANT:1
100:STN LOCK:YES
3. Enter desired MMC number via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MMC TENANT:1
102:CALL FWD:YES
4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Left Soft button to return to step 3 to
make additional entries
MMC TENANT:1
102:CALL FWD:NO
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-279
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
803 Assign Tenant Group
Allows the assignment of tenant groups on a port basis.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 803
Display shows
TENANT GROUP
2. Enter cabinet number if no change press
Right Soft button to move cursor
TENANT GROUP
3. Enter slot number if no change press RIGHT
Soft button to move cursor
TENANT GROUP
4. Enter port number if no change press
Right Soft button to move cursor
TENANT GROUP
5. Enter tenant number if no change press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
TENANT GROUP
C:1 S:1 -01
C:1 S:1 –01
C:1 S:2 -01
C:1 S:2 -03
C:1 S:2 -03
T:1
T:1
T:1
T:1
T:2
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
PROCEDURE
1. Press Transfer button and enter 803
Display shows
DISPLAY
TENANT GROUP
PORT:HYB-02 T:1
2. Enter port number if no change press
Right Soft button to move cursor
3. Enter tenant number if no change press
Right Soft button to return to step 2
Page 2-280
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL ASSIGNMENTS TENANT : 1
RELATED ITEMS
TENANT GROUP
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-281
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
805 Level And Gain
Allows the system administrator to set the base level of the TX volume on phones
system wide. There are eight(8) levels those are able to be controlled by the Volume
button on phone. And maximum controllable levels in the system are ten (10). Phone
station users can vary eight levels. So this MMC gives the most flexibility to the
system administrator so he can classify any desired eight(8) levels within eleven(11).
No
Type
Description
0
TX LEVEL CONTROL
Adjusts the transmitting sensitivity(Max. : 9) Default values are
followed :
INDEX : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LEVEL : 1 2 4 3 5 6 7 8
1
MISC TSW GAIN
Adjusts the level of the internal music source or the external music
source.(0-7, higher numbers mean lower levels) Default value is 0.
2
TSW GAIN CONTROL
Adjusts the tone sensitivity(As shown below, there are 8 types of
matrix connections of the T-Switch that adjusts the tone sensitivity.
Connection between Trunk lines are only applicable when set as 0
in MMC 426.)
0 DGP
DLI phone
1 SLT
SLI phone
2 ATRK
Analog trunk
3 DTRK Digital trunk
4 VOIP
MGI port or IP-based phone
5 WLI
WLI port
Default values are followed :
RX
DGP
SLT
ATRK
DTRK
VOIP
WLI
DGP"
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
SLT"
0.0
-2.5
0.0
-2.5
0.0
0.0
ATRK"
0.0
0.0
+1.9
-6.0
0.0
0.0
DTRK"
0.0
-2.5
+1.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
SVM"
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-6.0
0.0
VOIP"
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
WLI"
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
TX
Page 2-282
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
This MMC should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the
local SAMSUNG distributor.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 805
Display shows
TX LEVEL CONTROL
2. Press Volume button to make selection(0-3)
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 0"0
LEVEL 1"1
After selection is made, press Right Soft button
to move cursor.
3. (When the TX LEVEL CONTROL is selected)
a. Select the desired volume level via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next volume
level and press Right Soft button.
b. Enter desired volume data via dial keypad
OR
4. (When the MISC TSW GAIN is selected)
a. Enter desired MISC/BGM TSW gain via dial
keypad
OR
Press Volume button to select desired MISC/BGM
TSW gain and press Right Soft button.
5. (When the TSW GAIN CONTROL is selected)
a. Select the TX TSW connect type via dial button pad
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next TX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1"1
TX LEVEL CONTROL
LEVEL 1"3
MISC TSW GAIN
BGM/MOH :0
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT"DGP :+0.0
Page 2-283
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
b. Select the RX TSW connect type via dial button pad
OR
Press Volume button to go to the next RX TSW
connect type and press Right Soft button.
TSW GAIN CONTROL
c. Enter desired TSW gain control data via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to scroll data and press
Right Soft button
TSW GAIN CONTROL
SLT"ATRK:+0.0
SLT"ATRK:+1.9
7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-284
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
807 Phone Volume Control
Allows the system administrator to set the level of phone volume.
0 : KEY TONE VOL
1 : SIDETONE VOL
2 : HANDSET TX
3 : MIC TX LEVEL
4 : NOISE GUARD
5 : NOISE THRES
6 : ALC THRES.
7 : TX/RX THRES.
8 : TX/RX COMP.
9 : MIN RX VOL(28D Only)
FX
0 : LINE VOLUME
0 : SPEAKERER VOLUME
1 : NOR.LP ATTEN
2 : MIC LP ATTEN
3 : ACOU DECOUPL
4 : ELEC DECOUPL
5 : T/R RATIO
6 : R/T RATIO
This MMC should not be changed from the default levels without the assistance of the
local SAMSUNG distributor.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
Page 2-285
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 807
Display shows
VOL.CONTROL:US24
2. Enter phone type via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
3. Enter volume item via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
4. Enter volume data via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
VOL.CONTROL:EU24
KEY TONE VOL:1
KEY TONE VOL:1
SIDETONE VOL:1
HANDSET TX
:6
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
DEPEND ON PHONE TYPE
21D
KEY TONE VOL : 1
SIDETONE VOL : 1
HANDSET TX : 4
MIC TX LEVEL : 3
NOISE GUARD : 8
NOISE THRES. : 1
ALC THRES. : 7
TX/RX THRES. : 3
TX/RX COMP. : 5
MIN RX VOL : 6
Page 2-286
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
FX
LINE VOLUME : 3
SPKER VOLUME : 14
NOR.LP ATTEN : 4
MIC LP ATTEN : 4
ACOU DECOUPL : 8
ELEC DECOUPL : 8
T/R RATIO : 2
R/T RATIO : 2
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-287
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
809 System MMC Language
Allows system programmer to assign a LCD display based on system programming
language.
0 : ENGLISH
1 : GERMAN
2 : PORTUGAL
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 809
Display shows
SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
2. Enter desired language number via dial button
pad.
OR press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
SYS.MMC LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
GERMAN
3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ENGLISH
RELATED ITEMS
MULTIPLE LANGUAGE
Page 2-288
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
811 Reset System
Provides two methods of restarting the system. The first method restarts the system
and clears all memory. The second method restarts the system only. If clear all
memory is selected, only the default data will return. Extreme care should be taken
when using this MMC. If the system is restarted, all voice/data connections are
dropped. If memory is cleared, all customer data is deleted and the system returns to
defaulted status.
No
Reset Type
Description
0
RESET SYSTEM
System reset only with Smart Media read.
1
CLEAR MEMORY
System reset and make default system with Smart Media read.
2
FAST RESTART
System reset only without Smart Media read.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 811
Display shows
SYSTEM RESTART
2. Enter reset type(0-2) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
SYSTEM RESTART
3. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
SYSTEM RESTART
RESET SYSTEM?NO
CLEAR MEMORY?NO
CLEAR MEMORY?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
4. Dial 1 for YES or 0 for NO.
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE?YES
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-289
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
5. If clear memory, system will return with default
time and date and default extension number
OR
If system just restarted, it will return to normal
programmed status
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
Page 2-290
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
812 Set Country Code
This MMC must be run by the installer before any other programming is done.
Allows the system installer to select system software country. If you change the
country selection, the system will be restart and all customer data returns to defaulted
status according to the selected country.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 812
Display shows
SELECT COUNTRY
2. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button
SELECT COUNTRY
3. Press Volume button to select Yes or No and
press Right Soft button
DEFAULTING SYSTM
Undefined
RUSSIA/CIS
ARE YOU SURE?NO
if you select YES, this will restart the system and all data make default.
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ITALY
RELATED ITEMS
All MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-291
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
815 Customer Database Copy
Provides a means to copy the customer database to the FMDB(Smart Media card
Data Base). This enables the on board database(SRAM) to be copied to the FMDB
and also allows the FMDB database to be copied to the on board database. A daily
save can be programmed to automatically save the on board data base to the FMDB.
This insures that an up to date database is always available in the case of a
catastrophic failure. A daily save time of 00:00 means there is no save performed.
It is recommended to CLEAR the FMDB before the SRAM is copied to it. When the
SRAM is copied to the FMDB there is no interruption in service. If the FMDB is
copied to the SRAM the system will reset to accept the new data.
Database Type
Description
FMDB
Flash Memory Database
SRAM
On-Board database
S:mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Indicates the time the database was saved to the FMDB or the time the
SRAM was last saved
DAILY SAVE hh:mm
The time the SRAM will be saved to the FMDB
A Smart Media card of 16 MB or 32 MB must be installed in order to copy the on
board database(SRAM) on to the Smart Media card(FMDB).
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 815
Display shows
If the Smart Media is used already, the display
shows
2. Press Right Soft button to move cursor
CUST DBASE:FMDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
CUST DBASE:FMDB
SMART IS BUSY
CUST DBASE:FMDB
S:12/01/01 00:00
Page 2-292
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3. Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
CUST DBASE:FMDB
4. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button
CUST DBASE:FMDB
5. Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
press Right Soft button
CUST DBASE:FMDB
If you select YES, the display shows
CLEAR FMDB
CLEAR FMDB
:NO
:YES
ARE YOU SURE?NO
CUST DBASE:FMDB
Cleared....
6. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
CUST DBASE:SRAM
7. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
CUST DBASE:SRAM
8. Input save time
OR
Press Right Soft button to move cursor
CUST DBASE:SRAM
9. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
CUST DBASE:SRAM
10. Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to make change and
return to the step 9
DAILY SAVE:00:00
DAILY SAVE:00:00
DAILY SAVE:23:30
COPY TO FMDB:NO
CUST DBASE:SRAM
ARE YOU SURE?:YES
11. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
DAILY SAVE 00:00(no daily save)
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-293
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
816 Conference Gain
Provides a tool to adjust the gain or loss of stations and trunks in the conference
bridge. This is made available to allow for the adjustment of the conference bridge
due to permanent unsatisfactory Trunk Line conditions that may inhibit a satisfactory
conference bridge. Programming adjustments can be made on individual conference
analog trunk members.
Option
MEMBER
Description
This identifies which size of conference the adjustment will be made for. ie.
3,4 or 5 party conference.
A-TRK
This identifies which analog trunk member that is being addressed.
CNF
This is the gain or loss adjustment in the conference bridge.
SW
This is the gain or loss adjustment in the time division switch.
This MMC is not to correct low volume. To be used with the support of local
SAMSUNG distributor.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 816
Display shows
CONFERENCE GAIN
2. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to make change and
to move cursor
CONFERENCE GAIN
3. Dial 3,4 or 5.(e.g., 4 part conference bridge.)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MEMBER:4
A-TRK:0
CNF:-6.0
SW:+0.0
Page 2-294
USE DEFAULT :YES
USE DEFAULT :NO
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
4. Dial 0 to 4.(e.g., 2 analog trunk member)
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:2
5. Press Volume button to select CNF gain and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:2
6. Press Volume button to select SW gain and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor
MEMBER:4 A-TRK:2
CNF:-6.0
SW:2.5
CNF:-6.0
SW:2.5
CNF:-6.0
SW:-6.0
7. Press TRSF to exit
OR
Press SPK to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
USE DEFAULT : YES
Member
A-TRK
0
1
2
3
CNF
-2.5
-2.5
-2.5
SW
+0.0
+0.0
-2.5
CNF
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
SW
+0.0
+0.0
-2.5
-6.0
CNF
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
-6.0
SW
+0.0
+0.0
-2.5
-6.0
-6.0
4
5
3
4
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-295
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
818 Program Download
Change the version by downloading new version program stored Flash Memory to
Motherboard.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 818
Display shows
PGM DOWNLOAD
2. Press Volume button to select program type
and press Right Soft button to move cursor.
PGM DOWNLOAD
3. Press Volume button to select YES and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
If you select program download,
the system will restart.
SYSTEM PGM
SYS:OFIC12.PGM
SYS:OFIC12.PGM
DOWNLOAD NOW?NO
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
Page 2-296
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
820 Assign System Link ID
This MMC is used to assign the system link ID for PRI and VoIP networking.
Up to 50 link Ids can be entered including SELF ID. In addition each Link ID is also
associated with the IP address for that system and IP address type.
Option
Description
LINK ID
System ID for networking feature.
SIGNAL G/W
System IP address for VoIP networking
IP TYPE
System IP address type for VoIP networking. SELF system IP address type
determines ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’ on MMC 830.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
HOLD
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
Used to delete an entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 820
Display shows
SYSTEM LINK ID
2. Enter SELF link ID via dial keypad and
press Right Soft button
SYSTEM LINK ID
3. Press Volume button to select other link ID
and press Right Soft button to mover cursor.
SYSTEM LINK ID
4. Enter other link ID via dial keypad and
press Right Soft button
SYSTEM LINK ID
SELF :
SELF :11
NO.01:
NO.01:22
5. Press Transfer button and enter button to exit.
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-297
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 823 ASSIGN NETWORK COS
MMC 824 ASSIGN NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
Page 2-298
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
822 Set Virtual Extension Type
Assigns the virtual extension port type. The virtual extension port types are followed :
No
Port Type
Description
00
SLT
Emulates SLI port
01
24 BTN SET
24 buttons phone
02
12 BTN SET
12 buttons phone
03
7 BTN SET
7 buttons phone
04
6 BTN SET
6 buttons phone
05
28 BTN SET
28 buttons phone
06
18 BTN SET
18 buttons phone
07
8 BTN SET
8 buttons phone
08
38 BTN SET
38 buttons phone
09
21 BTN SET
21 buttons phone
10
14 BTN SET
14 buttons phone
11
NONE
not used
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ANS/RLS
Used to select all
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 822
Display shows
[3501]PORT TYPE
2. Enter virtual extension number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
OR
Press ANS/RLS button to select all
[3502]PORT TYPE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
SLT
SLT
[ALL] PORT TYPE
SLT
Page 2-299
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
3.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Enter virtual extension type
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and move cursor
[3501]PORT TYPE
21 BTN SET
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
3501-3546 : SLT
3401-3480 : 21 BTN SET
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
Page 2-300
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
823 Assign Network COS
Assigns the class of service for networking.
No
Option
Default
Description
01
CALL OFFER
Y
Call Offer
03
CC PATH RSV
Y
CC Path Reservation
04
CC SIG CONN
Y
CC Retention of Signal Connection
05
CC SVC RETN
Y
CC Service Retention
06
CCBS
N
Call Completion to Busy Subscriber
07
CCNR
N
Call Completion on No Reply
08
CFB
Y
Call Forward Busy
09
CFNR
Y
Call Forward No Reply
10
CFU
Y
Call Forward Unconditional
11
CI
N
Call Intrusion
12
CI CAPABIL
2
Intrusion Capability Level(1-3)
14
CI PROTECT
2
Intrusion Protection Level(0-3)
23
CONP LEVEL
3
CONP Level(0 : none, 1 : Alert, 2 : Busy, 3 : Both)
26
CT RE-ROUTE
N
Transfer By Rerouting
27
DND TONE
N
DND Announcement
28
DNDO
Y
Do Not Disturb Override
29
DNDO CAPABL
2
DNDO Capability Level(0-3)
30
DNDO PROTEC
2
DNDO Protection Level(1-3)
31
PATH REPL.
Y
Path Replacement
32
PATH RETEN
N
Path Retention
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-301
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 823
Display shows
NETWORK COS (01)
2. Dial the class of service number(01-30)
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
NETWORK COS (02)
3.
Dial the feature number
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
NETWORK COS (02)
Enter 0 for NO, or 1 for YES
OR
Press Volume button to select YES or NO and
Press Right Soft button to store data
NETWORK COS (01)
4.
5.
01:CALL OFFER :Y
01:CALL OFFER :Y
03:CC PATH RSV:Y
03:CC PATH RSV:N
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 301 ASSIGN STATION COS
Page 2-302
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
824 Network Dial Translation
Assigns the digit translation table used for networking. Generally under networking
condition, you must dial the node ID and extension number to call the another node
extension. It’s not convenient. In this MMC, the system provides the easy digit
translation of NETWORK LCR DIAL number. The translated digits are works like as
LCR plus translated digits. Using this MMC, you only dial the another node
extension number and call the another node extension simply. The system provides
96 entry of network dial translation.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 824
Display shows
01:601"
2. Dial the entry number
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
01:601"_
3. Enter digit string(max. 8digits) and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
01:601"60201
4. Enter the minimum number of user dialled digits
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
01:601"60201
5. Enter the waiting number of dial until LCR is
operated
OR
Press Volume button to select and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
01:601"60201
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
SZ:0 MAX:00 MB:N
SZ:3 MAX:00 MB:N
SZ:3 MAX:06 MB:N
Page 2-303
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
6. Enter YES/NO to assign Mail Box for remote
extension automatically
OR
Press Volume button to select YES/NO and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
01:601"60201
SZ:3 MAX:06 MB:N
7. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
Page 2-304
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
825 Assign Networking Option
Assigns the options used for networking.
No
Option
0
ADD NUMBER TO NAME
Description
Assign to includes the extension number in the name field of
Q-SIG standard message.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
DISPLAY
Press Transfer button and enter 825
Display shows
ADD NUMB TO NAME
YES
Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ADD NUMB TO NAME : YES
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 710 LCR DIGIT TABLE
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 820 ASSIGN SYSTEM LINK ID
MMC 824 NETWORK DIAL TRANSLATION
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-305
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
829 LAN Printer Parameter
This program sets the various parameters required for printing to a LAN connected
device.
The three types of data listed below can be displayed using the LAN printer.
01 : SMDR
02 : TRAFFIC REPORT
03 : ALARM REPORT
The items that are set in this program are listed below :
Page 2-306
No
Option
Default
Description
00
DATA TYPE
01
CURR STATUS
OFF
Current status of the LAN printer
02
EMPTY BUFF
NO
Prints all data left in the buffer
03
UPDATE LAN
NO
Applies modified items
04
DESTINATION
OFF
Data transmit destination(Off, Printer, PC, Both)
05
PRINTER IP
200.1.1.1
The IP address of the LAN printer
06
PRINTER TCP
10010
The TCP port of the printer
07
LAN TCP
10020
LAN TCP port
08
RETRY COUNT
03
Re-transmit attempt count(00-10)
09
RETRY WAIT
010 sec
Wait time for re-transmit(005-250 sec)
10
PJL ENABLE
FALSE
Sets PJL(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
11
LANGUAGE
RAW
Printer language(0. RAW, 1. PCL, 2. PS)
12
PAPER SIZE
LETTER
Paper size(0. A4, 1. LETTER)
13
FONT TYPE
COURIER
Font type(0.COURIER, 1.TIMES NEW ROMAN)
14
DUPLEX ENAB
FALSE
Sets duplex(0. FALSE, 1. TRUE)
15
ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT
Orientation(0. PORTRAIT, 1. LANDSCAPE)
16
PRINT TRAY
DEFAULT
Printer tray(0.Default, 1.Tray1, 2.Tray2, 3.Manual)
17
RESOLUTION
300
Resolution(0.300, 1.600)
18
LINE/PAGE
60
Line per page
Type of data to be displayed
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 829
Display shows
[01] DATA TYPE
2. Enter type of data to be printed
OR
Press Volume button to select the type and press
the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
[02] DATA TYPE
3. Enter the item number
OR
Press Volume button to select the item and press
the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
[02] PRINTER IP
4. Select the data
OR
Press the VOLUME to select the data and press
the Right Soft button to move the cursor.
[02] PRINTER IP
SMDR
TRAFFIC REPORT
200. 1. 1. 1
168.219. 83.101
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit the
program
OR
Press Speaker button to move on to the next
program.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-307
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
830 Ethernet Parameters
This MMC provides a mean to configure the Internet Protocol(IP) addressing of the
OfficeServ 12 system. This MMC must be utilized if there are ITP series phones
and/or MGI card used on the system.
No
Parameter
00
SYSTEM IP ADDR
01
SYSTEM GATEWAY
Description
Specifies the IP address.
Specifies the designated gateway IP address used for contacting IP
devices beyond the local network subnet.
02
SYSTEM NET MASK
Specifies the IP subnet mask.
This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP
devices(subnet) that are within ‘direct reach’.(without having to go
through the designated network IP gateway).
03
SYSTEM RESET
Prompt to restart system when system IP address is changed.
This reset is same to FAST RESTART on MMC 811.
04
SYSTEM IP TYPE
Defines which IP addressing relationship is used for communications
to and from the system.
0 PRIVATE IP ONLY : The system assumes all IP phones and VoIP
connections are on the same network. And all IP addresses are
private IP address.
1 PRIVATE w PUBLIC : The system knows that there is a mixture of
IP phones and VoIP connections on the same network and on
remote network(s), thus communicates accordingly based upon
the entries in MMC 840(for IP phones), MMC 838(for other VoIP
gateways) or MMC 830.
2 PRIVATE IP ONLY : The system assumes all IP phones and VoIP
connections are on the same network. And all IP addresses are
public IP address.
05
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP
The Motherboard will originate communications, to IP phones and
VoIP connections outside the local network, using this IP address.
Communications to/from this IP will require involvement of the MGI
card. The system identifies communications to/from this address as
‘public’. This allows devices, on remote networks/subnets, to
establish communications with the system, without exposing your
LAN. See ‘SYSTEM IP TYPE’.
06
SYSTEM MAC ADDR
For your reference, and cannot be changed. The unique hardware
(MAC) address.
07
PCMMC ADDRESS
When system wants connect to PCMMC, system will be send to this
IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
08
REMOTE M/A ADDR
When system wants connect to remote M & A PC, system will be send
to this IP address for connection message. Reserved for future use.
Page 2-308
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be input for each(octet) field.
Example) 192.168.1.10 input must be : 192 168 001 010
The first 3 parameters : SYSTEM IP ADDR, SYSTEM GATEWAY, and SYSTEM NET
MASK are stored separate from the main system database, thus will not be defaulted
when MMC811 ‘CLEAR MEMORY’ is performed. Furthermore, any changes to these
parameters will not be applied until the system is reset.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 830
Display shows the system IP address.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
2. Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
3. Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet
numbers
IE 192 168 001 010 for 192.168.1.10
Cursor will return to Step 1 upon completion
of IP address entry.
SYSTEM IP ADDR
4. Press Volume button to make selection and
Press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYSTEM GATEWAY
5. Using the keypad enter three digit IP octet
numbers
I.e., 192 168 001 001 for 192.168.1.1
Cursor will return to Step 5 upon completion
of system gateway entry.
SYSTEM GATEWAY
6. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYSTEM RESTART
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
165.213. 97.185
165.213. 97.185
192.168.001.010
165.213. 97.
1
192.168.001.001
ARE YOU SURE? NO
Page 2-309
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
7. Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to store and move cursor.
SYSTEM RESTART
ARE YOU SURE? NO
8. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
SYSTEM IP ADDR : 165.213.97.185
SYSTEM GATEWAY : 165.213.97.1
SYSTEM NET MASK : 255.255.255.0
SYSTEM RESET : NO
SYSTEM IP TYPE : PRIVATE IP ONLY
SYSTEM PUBLIC IP : 1.1.1.1
SYSTEM MAC ADDR : SYSTEM DEPENDENT
PCMMC ADDRESS : 168.219.1.101
REMOTE M/A ADDR : 168.219.1.102
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
MMC 840 IP SET INFO
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
Page 2-310
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
832 VOIP Access Code
Provides a means to apply the Internet Protocol(IP) address to the VoIP gateway.
This MMC also assigns the number of channels that can be used for IP faxes.
No
Parameter
O/I
TABLE(00-62)
Description
Outbound or Inbound table use for specific access codes. Usually when the
system is used as a VoIP gateway the Outbound table is used.
The Inbound table is used to determine the number of digits to receive
before processing the call. Each table has 63 entries(00-62).
0
ACCESS DGT
This is the access code that is used once the VoIP gateway is accessed; this
directs a call based on the routing tables used. An access code table then
references an access code and correlates an IP address to the access code
for routing. A maximum of 8 digits are available.
1
DGT LENGTH
2
DEL.LENGTH
This field requests the number of digits that are expected to be received to
make up the whole access code.
This is the number of digits to delete after receiving the access code. If no
digits are deleted the access code will be sent as part of the call to the
destination to continue routing at the far end destination.
3
INSERT DGT
This is the digit(s) to insert for routing at the destination. This can be used
when different numbering plans exist or if a dial 9 access is needed to be
inserted in the dialled digits.
4
IP TABLE 1
This is the first table referenced for routing the access code to an IP
address. The system has 64 IP tables(00-63) with 16 entries(00-15) in each
table. See MMC 833.
5
IP START
This entry indicates where in a table to start looking for an IP code to
associate with the access code. This can be used to manage where to start
looking for an IP address in high traffic VoIP gateway applications.
Example) If IP address routing to the desired destination is known to be in
the last 7 entries of a table the IP START location would be 8. IP address
searching would start at entry 8.
6
GK USE
This parameter determines whether a H.323 Gatekeeper will be utilized to
establish this connection.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-311
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 832
Display shows the outbound and first access
code
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
2. Enter 0 for O(outbound) or 1 for I(inbound)
code table.
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
(O:00)ACCESS DGT
0
3. Enter access code table number(00-62) via dial
keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
1
4. Enter access code item(0-6) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
1
5. Enter access code data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to save and move cursor.
(O:01)ACCESS DGT
840
6. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
ACCESS DGT : 00-09(digits 0-9), 10-62 NONE
DGT LENGTH : 1
DEL.LENGTH : 1
INSERT DGT : NONE
IP TABLE 1 : 00
IP START : NONE
GK USE : NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 833 VOIP ADDRESS TABLE
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 836 H.323 GATEKEEPER OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
Page 2-312
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
833 VoIP IP Table
This MMC provides the IP addresses in tables pointed to by the VoIP code entry
(MMC832). There are 63 tables with up to 16 entries each. The destination IP
address is required to route dialled digits based on the access code and digits dialled.
The IP entry field is divided into 4 sections allowing modification of separate IP
address fields.
When changing any IP address/value, three digits must be input for each(octet) field.
Example) 192.168.1.10 input must be : 192 168 001 010
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 833.
Display shows the first table number.
TB(00)
2. Enter table number(00-62) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
TB(00)
3. Enter entry number(00-15) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select ion and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
TB(00)
4. Enter IP address via dial keypad.
Cursor will be return step 3.
TB(00)
0.
0.
0.
ENTRY (00)
0.
0.
0
ENTRY (00)
0.
0.
0
ENTRY (00)
0.
0.
0
ENTRY (00)
165.213. 87.110
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC entry.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-313
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
TB(00) ENTRY(00) : MMC830 SYSTEM IP ADDR
ALL OTHERS : EMPTY
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETER
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
MMC 838 PRIVATE IP ADDRESSES
Page 2-314
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
834 H.323 Options
This MMC provides various VoIP support options. The options set in this MMC are
set system-wide.
No
00
Option
GATEWAY CALL ID
Description
This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies this system.
Default is ‘1234’.
01
H.323 FAST SETUP
Enables or disables the H.323 Fast Start call setup method.
Default is ENABLE.
02
CALLER ID TYPE
This option controls the calling party identification type. There are 3
possible selections :
0 GWID : Which shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI : Which shows the calling station number(Default)
2 IP : Which shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.
06
TUNNELING
Enables or disables the need for additional channels using H.245
signalling. Tunnelling allows use of the H.245 signal channel with
the Q.931 channel. Default is ENABLE.
07
DEFAULT DIL NO
This allows programming of the default direct in line number when
digits are missing, or incorrect on an inbound call. Default is 500.
11
CODEC AUTO NEGO
Enables or disables Auto CODEC Negotiation when the MGI is
used as a H.323 gateway. Default is ON.
14
SIGNAL PORT
Indicate the port number for H.323 signalling and sets a range of
numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default
IP path or port used is 10000.
17
SEND CLIP TABLE
Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC323), which provides calling
party identification when using the MGI as a H.323 gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A single digit value
corresponding with the desired table in MMC323 should be entered
here. This is only used when MMC405 value is null. Default is1.
18
INCOMING MODE
This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is
used as a H.323 gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING : Follows MMC406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS : Follows MMC714(default)
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT : Follows MMC724
19
ALLOW GW CHECK
When using a gatekeeper, this permits the H.323 gateway to check
for gatekeeper presence. Default is DISABLE.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-315
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 834
Display shows the first option.
GATEWAY CALL ID
2. Enter H.323 option number(00-19) via
dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
H.323 FAST SETUP
3. Enter H.323 option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
H.323 FAST SETUP
1234
DISABLE
ENABLE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC.
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323 CALLING PARTY NUMBER
MMC 405 CO LINE TEL NUMBER
MMC 306 TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
MMC 714 DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
MMC 724 DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
MMC 832 VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
MMC 837 SIP OPTIONS
Page 2-316
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
835 MGI DSP Options
This MMC provides various MGI DSP options. The options set in this MMC are
MGI-type specific.
MGI parameters are followed :
No
00
Parameter
AUDIO CODEC
Description
Selects which audio CODEC compression will be used. G.729A(8K),
G.729(8K), G.711(64K), G.723.1(5.3K-6.4K). Default is G.729A
01
ECHO CANCEL
Enables or disables echo cancellation. This function removes echo that
is generated by voice reflection and packet delay. Default is ENABLE.
02
SILENCE SUP
This parameter determines whether silence suppression is used This
prevents transmission during the silence period of a call, and conserves
bandwidth when enabled. Default is ENABLE.
03
IN FILTER
This option select input filtering of the DSP. This should always be set as
ENABLE.
04
OUT FILTER
This option select output filtering of the DSP. This should always be set
as ENABLE.
05
INPUT GAIN
PCM input gain value of DSP. The range is-31Db-32dB(0-63).
This set the quality of PCM voice from the VoIP DSP to the site. Default
is 32(0 dB).
06
VOICE VOL
This value selects the voice volume. The range is-31dB-31dB(0-63).
Default is 32(0 dB).
07
FRAME COUNT
This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets
generated by the MGI card. The range is 020-240ms Default is 40ms.
08
JITTER OPT
This is a scale value that introduces a intentional buffer(delay) of the
transmission of VoIP packets generated by the MGI card. This value
determines whether the focus is on packet loss or packet delay.
The range is 00-12. Default is 4.
09
MIN JITTER
Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.
The range is 010-300ms Default is 30ms.
10
MAX JITTER
Decides the maximum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment.
The range is 010-300ms. Default is 150ms.
11
FAX ECM
This option selects retry of Fax-over-IP, in the case that errors are
detected. Default is ENABLE.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-317
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
No
Parameter
12
MAX FAX CNT
13
DTMF TYPE
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Description
This is maximum number of channels that can be simultaneously utilized
for Fax-over-IP. The range is 00-16. Default is 2.
There are two types of DTMF transmission : INBAND, which is industry
standard(H.245) type DTMF transport, and OUTBAND which is a
Samsung proprietary method.
14
TOS FIELD
An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external routers, switches,
etc(that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization)-to identify the transportpriority value of data packets generated by the MGI card. This value can
be left at default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not
support this method of bandwidth management. Default is all bits 0.
15
FAX RETRY
This option selects retry count of Fax-over-IP, in the case that errors are
detected. The range is 0-4 and 0 means no retry. Default is 3.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 835
Display shows the first option
MGI:AUDIO CODEC
2. Enter MGI type(0-2) via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MGI:AUDIO CODEC
3. Enter MGI DSP parameter via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
MGI:AUDIO CODEC
4. Enter MGI DSP parameter
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
MGI:AUDIO CODEC
Page 2-318
G.729A
G.729A
G.729A
G.729
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-319
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
836 H.323 GK Options
Provides a means to set the H.323 gatekeeper parameters for an optional external
industry-standard H.323 network gatekeeper, using Registration, Admissions, and
Status signalling(RAS). The settings are system wide.
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each
(octet) field. Example) 192.168.1.10 input must be : 192 168 001 010
No
Option
00
GK CONNECTION
01
GK ROUTING
Description
This enables or disables the H.323 call to connect to a gatekeeper.
Default is DISABLE.
This enables or disables routing of calls through a gatekeeper.
Default is DISABLE.
02
GK IP ADDRESS
This is gatekeeper’s IP address. Default is 0.0.0.0
03
GK NAME
This is alphanumeric name identifier of the gatekeeper. An entry of
16 characters. Default is ‘Gatekeeper’.
04
ALTER GK IP ADDR
This provide for an alternate gatekeeper address. Default is 0.0.0.0
05
H.323 GATEWAY ID
This is the H.323 identifier used by the MGI when registering with
the gatekeeper. This can be up to 32 characters. Default is
‘OfficeServ 12’.
06
E.164 GATEWAY NO
07
GK KEEP ALIVE
This is the E.164 identifier used by the H.323 trunk when registering
with the gatekeeper. This can be up to 16 digits in length.
This is the timer that the MGI uses to acknowledge the presence of
the gatekeeper. The range is 000-999 seconds. Default is 0 SEC.
08
GK DOWN ROUTE
This provides an alternate route in case the primary gatekeeper is
down. Selections are PSTN or ALTER GK. Default is PSTN.
09
GK RAS TYPE
Select if AUTO or MANUAL, depending on your gatekeeper’s
11
URQ REASON
Select ON or OFF for usage of Un-register Request RAS(URQ)
MODE
messages. Default is ON.
capabilities. Default is AUTO.
12
RRQ FAIL TIME
Programs the time frame to re-send Registration Request RAS
(RRQ) messages to a gatekeeper. Default is 30 seconds.
The range is 1-99.
13
GRQ SEND
Select ON or OFF for usage of Gatekeeper RAS Request(GRQ)
messages. Default is OFF.
Page 2-320
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 836
Display shows the first available option
GK CONNECTION
2. Enter H.323 GK option via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
GK ROUTING
3. Enter H.323 GK option data
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
GK ROUTING
DISABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 834 H.323 OPTIONS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-321
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
837 SIP Options
This MMC permits the adjustments of optional Session Initiation Protocol(SIP)
trunking parameters. The system supports SIP and H.323 on a per call-per-port basis.
The settings are system-wide.
When changing any IP address/value, listed below, three digits must be input for each
(octet) field. Example) 192.168.1.10 input must be : 192 168 001 010
No
Option
00
GATEWAY CALL ID
01
CALLER ID TYPE
Description
This a up to 12 digits numeric entry that identifies this system.
Default is ‘1234’.
This option controls the calling party identification type. There are 3
possible selections:
0 GWID : Which shows the gateway call ID.
1 ANI : Which shows the calling station number(Default)
2 IP : Which shows the calling H.323 gateway IP address.
02
DEFAULT DIL NO
This allows programming of the default direct in line number when
digits are missing, or incorrect on an inbound call. Default is 500.
03
UDP PORT : TRUNK
Sets the UDP port used on a SIP trunk call. Default is 5060.
04
UDP PORT : PHONE
Sets the UDP port used on a SIP phone call. Default is 5070.
05
RE-TRANS. T1 TIME
The initial re-transmission time if no answer based on the
RFC2543 specification. The range is 0-9900ms. Default is 500ms.
06
RE-TRANS. T2 TIME
The maximum re-transmission time if no answer based on the
RFC2543 specification. The range is 0-9900ms. Default is 4000ms.
07
RE-TRANS. T4 TIME
The time the User Agent Server waits after receiving the ACK
message. Based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900ms. Default is 5000ms.
08
GENERAL RING TM
The server shall retransmit the response during this amount of time
until the requested retransmission is received. For example, the
wait time after sending 200 OK for INFO. The range is 0-99900ms.
Default is 5000ms.
09
INVITE LING TM
After the client sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the client
cannot confirm if the server received the ACK message. The client
waits for this amount of time after sending ACK for the Final
Response. The range is 0-99900ms. Default is 5000ms.
10
PROVISIONAL TIME
After receiving the Provision Response, the User Agent shall wait
for this amount of time until Timeout ends.
The range is 0-999900ms. Default is 180000ms.
Page 2-322
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
11
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Option
INV.NO RESP TIME
Description
Before sending Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent shall
wait for this amount of time. The range is 0-99900ms. Default is
5000ms.
12
GEN.NO RESP TIME
Before sending Cancel for General Request, the User Agent shall
wait for this amount of time. The range is 0-99900ms. Default is
5000ms.
13
REQ.RETRY TIME
After sending General Request, the User Agent shall wait for the
Final Response for this amount of time. The range is 0-99900ms.
Default is 5000ms.
14
SIP SERVER ENBLE
Sets ENABLE or DISABLE to use an optional external industrystandard SIP Server. Default is DISABLE.
15
SIP SERVER IP
Sets SIP server IP address. Default is 0.0.0.0.
16
SIP SERVER PORT
Sets the port to use on the SIP Server. Default is 5060.
14
SIGNAL PORT
Indicate the port number for SIP signalling and sets a range of
numbers allowed by firewall equipment. The common and default
IP path or port used is 10000.
18
SEND CLIP TABLE
Refers to SEND CLI NUMBER(MMC323), which provides calling
party identification when using the MGI as a SIP gateway.
This provides station ID of the calling station. A single digit value
corresponding with the desired table in MMC323 should be entered
here. This is only used when MMC405 value is null. Default is1.
19
INCOMING MODE
This option selects how incoming calls are routed when the MGI is
used as a SIP gateway.
0 FOLLOW TRUNK RING : Follows MMC406
1 FOLLOW DID TRANS : Follows MMC714(default)
2 FOLLOW INCOM DGT : Follows MMC724
20
ALLOW GW CHECK
When using a gatekeeper, this permits the SIP gateway to check
for gatekeeper presence. Default is DISABLE.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-323
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 834
Display shows the first option.
GATEWAY CALL ID
2. Enter SIP option number(00-20) via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
CALLER ID TYPE
3. Enter SIP option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
CALLER ID TYPE
1234
ANI
IP
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 323
MMC 405
MMC 306
MMC 714
MMC 724
MMC 832
MMC 834
Page 2-324
CALLING PARTY NUMBER
CO LINE TEL NUMBER
TRUNK RING ASSIGNMENT
DID NUMBER AND NAME TRANSLATION
DIAL NUMBERING PLAN
VOIP OUTBOUND DIGITS
H.323 OPTIONS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
840 IP Phone Information
This MMC provides a means to register the IP phones with the OfficeServ 12 system.
During registration, the IP and MAC addresses are also registered. The User ID and
Password must match the table entry in this MMC for the IP phone to be registered.
The system made default phone numbers are 3201-3299 and made default User ID’s
match the default station numbers(3201-3299). The system default password is 1234.
IP phones must be individually programmed with User ID and Password to register
with the system.
No
00
Information
USER ID
Description
This is the ID the IP phone must match to register with the OfficeServ 12
system. This entry can be alphanumeric.(Default: first 99 IP phones are
‘3201’-‘3299’, others are EMPTY)
01
USER PSWD
This is the Password the IP phone must also have to register with the
OfficeServ 12 system. This entry can be alphanumeric. Default is ‘1234’.
02
IP ADDR
This is the IP address of the IP phone once registered with the system.
This is read only data. Default is 0.0.0.0.
03
MAC ADDR
This is MAC address of the IP phone once registered with the system.
This is read only data. Default is FFFFFFFFFFFF.
04
SIG PORT
This is the IP UDP port of the IP phone once registered with the system.
This is read only data. This information will be needed when traversing NAT
routers, firewalls, etc. Default is 6000.
05
VOICE PORT
This is the IP RTP port of the IP phone once registered with the system.
This is read only data. This information will be needed when traversing NAT
routers, firewalls, etc. Default is 9000.
06
IP TYPE
This is the type of IP network used : PRIVATE or PUBLIC. Default is
PRIVATE.
07
DSP TYPE
This selects which CODEC this phone’s DSP will use. G.729A(low bandwidth)
or G.711(high bandwidth). This data uses IP phone to IP phone connection
only, others case are follow MGI CODEC type. Default is G.729A.
08
PHONE TYPE
This the type of IP phone used. SAMSUNG or SIP(future). Please should
be use SAMSUNG.
09
REGIST CLR
This is used to clear the registration of a particular IP phone. This is similar
to phone plug out and plug in, and the useful for maintenance. Because
technician will be re-registered IP phone without network cable find out first.
10
FRAME
This value determines the transmission interval time of VoIP packets
COUNT
generated by the IP phone. This data uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP
PARA DOWN=PHONE DATA only. The range is 10-40ms. Default is 10ms.
11
JITTER SIZE
Decides the minimum time to consider delay for jitter adjustment. This data
uses case of MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN=PHONE DATA only.
The range is 10-90ms. Default is 20ms.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-325
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
No
12
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Information
TOS FIELD
Description
An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external routers, switches,
etc(that optionally support TOS-bit prioritization)-to identify the transportpriority value of data packets generated by the IP phone. This value can
be left at default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not
support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses case of
MMC 841 ITP DSP PARA DOWN=PHONE DATA only. Default is all bits
0.
13
S/W VERSION
Display IP phone software version. This read only data.
14
S/W UPGRADE
This is used IP phone software upgrade request command. When this
selects YES and press Right Soft button, the system requests to IP phone
software upgrade with TFTP IP address.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to store data and advance to next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press TRSF 840
Display shows
[3201]USER
2. Enter IP phone number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[3210]USER
3. Enter IP phone option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
[3210]DSP TYPE
4. Enter option data via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
[3210]DSP TYPE
Page 2-326
ID
3201
ID
3210
G.729A
G.711
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 615 MGI GROUP
MMC 616 FIXED MGI USER
MMC 830 ETHERNET PARAMETERS
MMC 835 MGI DSP OPTIONS
MMC 841 SYSTEM IP OPTIONS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-327
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
841 System IP Options
This MMC provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options.
The options set in this MMC are system-wide.
There 9 option categories are list :
No
0
Option
PHONE VERSION
Description
Sets running IP-based phone and new phone software version with
the system. Defaults are 0000.
0 2 LINE ITP : 2 line LCD IP phone
1 LARGE ITP : Large LCD IP-based phone
2 2LINE ITP2 : line LCD IP-based phone
3 WIPM APPL : Wireless IP-based mobile phone software.
4 WIPM BOOT : Wireless IP-based mobile phone boot program.
1
PHONE TFTP IP
Sets phone software upgrade TFTP server IP address.
Default is 0.0.0.0.
2
ITP REGISTRATION
Defines the method that IP-based phones use to registration
themselves with the system.
0 TYPE : Defines the method that IP-based phones use to
registration themselves with the system. Default is SYS PSWD.
0 SYS PSWD : System will authenticate the IP-based phones
with the value contained within parameter ITP
REGISTRATION : PSWD within this same MMC.
1 ITP PSWD : System will authenticate the IP-based phones
according to entries made in MMC 840.
2 DISABLE : System will not authenticate IP-based phones at all.
1 PSWD : This is a system-wide password value used for
registration of IP phones. Default is ‘1234’.
3
EASYSET OPTION
Sets EasySet link via LAN option with the system.
0 PSWD : This is a system-wide password value used for
authentication of EasySet server. Default is ‘1234’.
1 ALIVE TIME : This is a EasySet link via LAN alive check timer.
Default is 0 SEC.
4
CTI LINK OPTION
Sets CTI link via LAN option with the system.
0 SMDR REPORT : Sets YES or NO for SMDR data to CTI link via
LAN. Default is NO
1 ALIVE TIME : This is a CTI link via LAN alive check timer. If this
sets 0, the system will not check link alive. Default is 300 SEC.
Page 2-328
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
No
5
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
Option
ITP DSP PARA
Description
Sets IP phone DSP parameter of system-wide.
0 FRAME CNT : This value determines the transmission interval
time of VoIP packets generated by the IP phone. This data
uses DOWN=SYS DATA case only on this MMC. The range is
10-40ms. Default is 10ms.
1 JITTER BUF : Decides the minimum time to consider delay for
jitter adjustment. This data uses DOWN=SYS DATA case only
on this MMC. The range is 10-90ms. Default is 20ms.
2 TOS : An eight-bit binary value that will be utilized by external
routers, switches, etc(that optionally support TOS-bit
prioritization)-to identify the transport-priority value of data
packets generated by the IP phone. This value can be left at
default value(00000) if your network infrastructure does not
support this method of bandwidth management. This data uses
case only on this MMC. Default is all bits 0.
3 DOWN : Determines data uses system-wide data or each phone
data for IP-based phone DSP control. Default is SYS DATA.
0 SYS DATA : System-wide data will be used.(MMC 841 data)
1 PHONE DATA : Each phone data will be used.
(MMC 840 data)
6
ITP TX GAIN
Sets IP-based phone TX gain value. Defaults are followed but
depend on Country
7
ITP RX GAIN
Sets IP-based phone RX gain value. Defaults are followed but
depend on Country
8
ITP VERS UPGRADE
Sets IP-based phone software upgrade option with the system.
0 TYPE : Sets IP-based phone software upgrade type. Default is
MMC COMMAND.
0 MMC COMMAND : IP-based phone software upgrades
manually in MMC 840.
1 PHONE CON : IP-based phone software upgrades
automatically at phone connection.
2 AUTO TIME : IP-based phone software upgrades
automatically at set time.
1 START TIME : IP-based phone software automatically upgrade
start time. Default is 0000.(Disable)
2 INTERVAL : IP-based phone software automatically upgrade
interval time. Default is 10 seconds.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-329
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 841
Display shows the first available option
PHONE VERSION
2. Enter option category number(0-8) via dial
keypad.
Or press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
ITP REGISTRATION
3. Enter option number via dial keypad.
OR
Press Volume button to make select and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
ITP REGISTRATION
4. Enter option data
OR
Press Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
ITP REGISTRATION
LARGE DGP: 0000
TYPE: SYS PSWD
PSWD: 1234
PSWD: 8228
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
SEE DESCRIPTION
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 840 IP PHONE INFORMATION
Page 2-330
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
845 WLAN Para
This MMC modifies the WLAN parameter.
Set the network configuration with the WLAN parameters, which are the SYSTEM
ID, the System KEY, and the WBS24 and SIP related with WLAN call.
The system KEY is used internally to distinguish between systems when registering a
terminal. The default value is ‘00000’, but only when this value is modified to
another value, an electric power will be supplied to the WBS24, thus enabling the use
of the WLAN terminal, In addition, the System KEY serves as an identification ID
when the WLAN terminal connects to the WBS24.
The default value of the SYSTEM ID, ‘WBS24’, must be modified to another value
in order to use a multiple system in one area. The DNS setting for WLAN is
additionally described in this menu.
Set the network configuration for WBS24 by setting the IP assignment, Netmask, and
Gateway. These settings should be compatible with the Intranet since the network
configuration setting is essential for data service. In addition, the RF frequency for
WBS24 should be selected. Currently up to 14 frequencies may be selected.
Session Initiation Protocol(SIP) variables used for the WBS24(Basic) can be defined.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press the Transfer button, and enter 845.
WLAN : SYSTEM ID
0000
845: WLAN PARA
SELECT PROG ID
2. Press the Speaker button to enter the select menu.
When the cursor is at WLAN, press the
[UP & DOWN] button and select
WLAN, WBS, or SIP.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
3. Press the Soft button and move to the SYSTEM
ID. When the cursor is below SYSTEM ID,
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
WBS24
WBS24
Page 2-331
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
press the [UP & DOWN] key and select
the setting menu for WLAN.
4. Set the items below at the WLAN menu.
SYSTEM ID : Use the Soft button to move the
cursor. Enter the new WLAN SYSTEM ID to
register.
WLAN: SYSTEM ID
WBS24
Press the Soft button and proceed to next register
status.
Register the DNS server(second) IP.
WLAN: 2 ND DNS IP
0.
Register the DNS server(first) IP.
0.
0
WLAN: 1 ST DNS IP
0.
Register the SYSTEM KEY.
0.
0.
0.
0
WLAN: SYSTEM KEY
00000
Select the voice codec. Select from the four,
G711u, G711, G726, and G729 CODEC.
Numbers are given from 1 to 4 based on priority.
5. Set the items below at the WBS24 menu.
Register the WBS24 IP ADDRESS.
WLAN: CODEC LIST
CODEC 1: G726
WBS1 : IP ADDR
0.
Register the WBS24 RF CHANNEL.
0.
0.
0
WBS1: RF CH.
1
Displays the WBS24 status.
WBS1: STATUS
OFF
Displays the WBS24 VERSION.
WBS1: VERSION
Displays the WBS24 MAC ADDRESS.
WBS1: MAC ADDR
0000 0000 0000
Register the WBS24 NET MASK.
WBS1: NET MASK
255.255.255.
Page 2-332
0
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Register the WBS24 GATEWAY.
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
WBS1: GATEWAY
0.
6. Set the items below at the menu.
Register the RETRANS T1.
The initial re-transmission time if no answer
based on the RFC2543 specification. The range
is 0-9900ms. Default is 500 ms.
0.
0.
0
SIP : RETRANS T1
000500MS
Register the RETRANS T2.
The maximum re-transmission time if no answer
based on the RFC2543 specification. The range
is 0-9900ms. Default is 4000ms.
SIP : RETRANS T2
Register the RETRANS T4. The time the User
Agent Server waits after receiving the ACK
message. Based on the RFC2543 specification.
The range is 0-9900ms. Default is 5000 ms.
SIP : RETRANS T4
Register the GEN LINGER T. The server shall
retransmit the response during this amount of
time until the requested retransmission is
received. For example, the wait time after
sending 200 OK for INFO. The range is
0-99900ms. Default is 5000 ms.
SIP : GEN LINGER T
004000MS
004000MS
000000MS
Register the INV LINGER T. After the client
sends ACK for the INVITE Final Response, the
client cannot confirm if the server received the
ACK message. The client waits for this amount
of time after sending ACK for the Final
Response. The range is 0-99900ms. Default is
5000 ms
Register the STOP GENNR T. Before sending
Cancel for General Request, the User Agent shall
wait for this amount of time. The range is
0-99900ms. Default is 5000 ms.
Register the STOP INVNR T. Before sending
Cancel for the Invite Request, the User Agent
shall wait for this amount of time. The range is
0-99900 ms. Default is 5000 ms.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
SIP : STOP INVNR T
000000MS
Page 2-333
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Register the GEN REQ T. After sending General
Request, he User Agent shall wait for
the Final Response for this amount of time.
The range is 0-99900ms. Default is 5000 ms.
SIP : GEN REQ T
Register the PROVIS TIME. After receiving the
Provision Response, the User Agent shall
wait for this amount of time until Timeout ends.
The range is 0-999900ms. Default is 180000ms
SIP : PROVIS TIME
000000MS
180000MS
DEFAULT DATA
WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
WBS001
WBS001
WBS001
WBS001
WBS001
WBS001
WBS001
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP
SIP
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
SYSTEM ID " WBS24
SYSTEM KEY " 0000
2 ND DNS " 0. 0. 0. 0
1ST DNS " 0. 0. 0. 0
SYSTEM KEY " 34568
CODEC LIST " G726
VERSION
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
IP ADDR " 0. 0. 0. 0
RF CH. " 1
STATUS " OFF
VERSION
MAC ADDR " FFFF FFFF FFFF
NET MASK " 255.255.255. 0
GATEWAY " 0. 0. 0. 0
RETRANS T1 " 000500MS
RETRANS T2 " 0004000MS
RETRANS T4 " 0005000 ms
GEN LINGER T " 000000MS
INV LINGER T " 32000MS
STOP GENNR T " 000000MS
STOP INVNR T " 000000MS
GEN REQ T " 000000MS
PROVIS TIME " 180000MS
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFO(Station information)
MMC 847 WBS RESET
MMC 848 WLAN IP LIST(Station IP register)
Page 2-334
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
846 WIP Info
This MMC sets up the WIP-5000M wireless terminal’s information.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press the Transfer button, and enter 846.
846: WIP INFO
SELECT PROG ID
2. Press the Speaker button to enter the select
menu. When the cursor is at the phone number,
press the [UP & DOWN] button and select the
current phonenumber information. Press the
Soft button and move to the information menu
of each information menu, and select the setting
menu.
[3301] REGIETERED
3. Confirm the status of terminal register for each
phone number.
[3301] REGIETERED
4. Register the PASSWORD of terminal.
[3301] PASSWORD
NO
NO
0000
5. Register the USER ID of terminal.
[3301] USER ID
1212
6. Displays the MAC ADDRESS of the registered
terminal.
[3301] MAC ADDR
7. Displays the IP ADDRESS of the registered
terminal.
[3301] IP ADDRESS
8. Displays the IP OFFSET of the registered
terminal.
[3301] IP OFFSET
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-335
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
9. Displays the WBS NUMBER of the registered
terminal.
[3301] WBS NUMBER
10. Displays the WLI NUMBER of the registered
terminal.(Currently, This is not used)
[3301] WLI NUMBER
11. Displays the PHONE TYPE of the registered
terminal.
[3301] PHONE TYPE
12. Displays the location of the registered terminal.
[3301] LOCATED
NO
DEFAULT DATA
[3301] REGIETERED"NO
[3301] PASSWORD"0000
[3301] USER ID"1212
[3301] MAC ADDR
[3301] IP ADDRESS
[3301] IP OFFSET
[3301] WBS NUMBER
[3301] WLI NUMBER
[3301] PHONE TYPE
[3301] LOCATED"NO
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 847 WBS RESET
MMC 848 WLAN IP LIST
MMC 849 WLAN REGIST
Page 2-336
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
847 WBS Reset
This MMC is used for rebooting the WBS24, by software or independently. This
MMC is also used for initializing the WBS24.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press the Transfer button, and enter 847.
847: WBS RESET
SELECT PROG ID
2. Press the Speaker button and enter the select
menu. Press the Soft button and confirm
initialization of WBS.
3. Press the Soft button, or press [1] to select YES,
and the WBS will be initialized.
WBS RESET
RESET NOW ?
NO
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 848 WLAN IP LIST
MMC 849 WLAN REGIST
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-337
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
848 WIP List
This MMC848 is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN, or when creating
a new IP list. Up to 100 IP lists may be entered. MMC848 command is used for
setting the MAC address of data terminals to use wireless LAN.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press the Transfer button, and enter 848..
848: WLAN LISTS
SELECT PROG ID
2. Press the Speaker button and enter the select
menu. Press the Soft button to change
the IP ADDRESS
IP:001 USED
3. Use the Soft button to position the cursor at an
IP ADDRESS, and assign the IP ADDRESS by
entering values of 0-255.
IP:001 USED
4. Numbers next to USED indicates the terminal
number from which the IP ADDRESS was
assigned.
IP:001 USED 3301
0.0.0.0
168.0.0.0
168.219.149.5
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 847 WBS RESET
MMC 849 WLAN REGIST
Page 2-338
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
849 WLAN Regist
This MMC is used to enable or disable the register of a WIP500M mobile phone
within the WLAN. This MMC is also used to approve the WEP(Wired Equivalent
Privacy) enabling function where the WLAN is encrypted. The WEP key, which
must be used when WEP is enabled, can be configured with 16 characters or less.
Also, the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the data terminal in order to use the
wireless LAN.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press the Transfer button, and press 849.
849: WLAN REGIST
SELECT PROG ID
2. Press the Speaker button to enter the select menu.
Enter the PASSCODE to activate the register.
ENTER PASSCODE
3. Select ENABLE to register the terminal to the
REGISTER WLAN.
WLAN REGISTER
4. Select the WEP KEY setting when
ENCRYPTION is selected.
WBS WEP SERVICE
5. Enter WEP KEY values when the WEP KEY is
set.
WEP KEY
6. Can clear the register status for each terminal also.
WIP REGIST CLEAR
****
ENABLE
DISABLE
3301:FORCED
7. Press the Soft button in the IP to change or
allocate a MAC address.
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
MAC LIST : 01
FFFFFFFFFFFF
Page 2-339
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 846 WIP INFO
MMC 847 WBS RESET
MMC 848 WLAN IP LIST
Page 2-340
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
850 System Resource Display
This MMC is only used for system resource display. This is displayed the used
resources and the free resources. This is a READ ONLY MMC.
0 DTMFR DSP’S
1 CID DSP’S
2 CONF GROUP’S
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 850
Display shows
DTMFR DSP’S
2. Enter the option number(0-3)
OR
Press Volume button to select
CID DSP’S
USE:000 FREE:012
USE:000 FREE:014
3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-341
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
851 Alarm Reporting
This MMC is used to view, store, print or clear system alarms. There are two levels
of faults displayed via alarm code, major alarms and minor alarms. Major alarms
codes are usually service affecting and require a certified technician to determine the
fault. A minor alarm indicates a fault that may or may not be service affecting and
usually does not seriously degrade the systems operating capabilities. The alarm
buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on a first in-first out(FIFO) basis. Alarms will
provide a date and time stamp based on the system time. If applicable the hardware
cabinet, port, and/or slot will be displayed.
ALARM REPORTING OPTIONS(Select one of the options)
No
Option
Description
0
VIEW ALARM
View alarm buffer
1
OVERFLOW CONTROL
Determines buffer control when buffer is full. Default is
OVERWRITTEN.
0 OVERWRITTEN : When buffer is full, the oldest entry in
buffer overwritten.
1 STOP RECORDING : When buffer is full, stop recording
alarms.
3
CLEAR ALARM BUF
Clears alarm buffer.
4
PRINT ALARM BUF
Prints contents of alarm buffer to the assigned alarm IO port.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-342
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
TRANSFER
Used to scroll through system alarms.
Used to enter selections
Enter/leave option
Used to store data and move to next MMC
Enter/exit MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 851
Display shows
SYS ALARM REPORT
2. Enter desired option
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor.
SYS ALARM REPORT
3. System displays the alarm count number, date
and time stamp(uses station, configuration for
display format, date, time will
be 24 hour format). Alarm type and cause code
will display.
[00] 02/18 14:30
4. Press Volume button arrows to scroll through
other alarms
OR
Press Right Soft button to return step 2.
SYS ALARM REPORT
VIEW ALARMS
VIEW ALARMS
MNF02 C1-S02
VIEW ALARMS
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 SYSTEM ALARM ASSIGNMENTS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-343
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
852 System Alarm Assignments
This MMC allows the assignment of system alarms to ring and display the alarms on
stations that have the Alarm Key assigned. The System Alarm Key is programmed in
Station Key Assignments(MMC 722). System Alarm key programming is tenant
wide(tenant 1 and 2). Alarms not programmed to report to the System Alarm key will
still be retained in the maintenance alarm buffer for Alarm Reporting(MMC 851).
The alarm buffer will hold up to 100 alarms on a First In-First Out(FIFO) basis.
Pressing the System Alarm key will silence the audible alarm until another alarm is
generated by the system. The specific fault alarm data can be displayed via MMC
851 System Alarm Reporting.
Alarm Notification Off/On(0/1) determines if the alarm provides a visual and audible
notification to the System Alarm key station(s). Pressing the System Alarm key and
the release key will silence the audible alarm only at the station that pressed the
System Alarm key and the release key. See alarm displays table for assignments.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
TRANSFER
Used to scroll through system alarms.
Used to enter selections
Enter/leave option
Used to store data and move to next MMC
Enter/exit MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 852
Display shows
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
2. Enter desired Alarm Display number(e.g., 61)
OR
Press the Volume buttons to select desired
option and press the Right Soft button and to
advance the cursor.
61:MNF01 ACT:OFF
3. To select if the alarm is active press 1 for
YES and 0 for NO.
61:MNF01 ACT:ON
Page 2-344
POR Restart
Card Out
Card Out
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
An entry will advance the cursor to return to
step 2.
OR
Press the Volume buttons to make selection
and press the Right Soft button to save and
return step 2.
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL OFF
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 501 SYSTEM TIMERS
MMC 722 STATION KEY ASSIGNMENT
MMC 723 SYSTEM WIDE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
MMC 851 SYSTEM ALARM REPORTING
MMC 853 MAINTENANCE BUSY
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-345
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
853 Maintenance Busy
This MMC is used to place stations, trunks, and common resources equipment in a
maintenance busy condition. This can be used to isolate suspected intermittent
problem equipment. Stations placed in maintenance busy will behave like a station in
DND when called. The calling stations display(if equipped) will show ‘MADE
BUSY’ when called. The station display will still function with station and date.
When the busy station is accessed, it will function like a locked all station. Trunks
made busy can not originate calls. Common resource equipment such as DSP’s, CID
DSP's and miscellaneous equipment such as page port or voice mail port can also be
placed in a maintenance busy state.
MAINTENANCE BUSY OPTIONS
No
Option
Description
0
TRK
Trunks
1
STN
Stations
2
PAGE
Page Ports
3
DTMFR
DTMF Receiver(4/DSP)
4
CID
CID Receiver(14/DSP)
5
CONF
GRP #01-24
6
MGI
MGI ports
In cases of DTMFR, CID or R2MFC DSP selection when DSP is not mounted display
will show NONE. If mounted display will show IDLE by default.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
Page 2-346
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
TRANSFER
Scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Move cursor or select option
Used to advance next MMC
Exit
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 853
Display shows busy functions
MAINTENANCE BUSY
2. Enter busy function type(0-8) via dial keypad
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
MAINTENANCE BUSY
3. Enter station number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
MAINTENANCE BUSY
4. Press 1 to make busy or 0 to make idle
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 3.
MAINTENANCE BUSY
TRK
STN
STN
STN
:NONE"
:NONE"
:201"IDLE
:201"BUSY
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit Press
Speaker button to advance the next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
ALL IDLE
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 851 ALARM REPORTING
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-347
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
856 Tech Programming Logs
This MMC lists the date, time and entry location of the last eight times that
technician programming was accessed. This will allow a technician to determine if
there was unauthorised access to system programming and where this access
occurred. The information stored in this log will consist of 2 elements, the date and
time it occurred at and the access location.
There are 2 types of access location information as described below :
Type
NNNN
LAN
Description
This would be the extension number of a phone that had accessed programming directly.
This would indicate that programming was accessed by PCMMC via the LAN
connection on the Motherboard.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
Used to scroll through options
KEYPAD
Used to enter selections
SOFT
Move cursor left and right
SPEAKER Used to advance next MMC
HOLD
Used to clear previous entry
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 856
Display shows
(1) 11/22 11:03" 201
2. Enter index number(e.g., 3)
OR
Press Volume button to scroll
(3) 11/22 12:30"
:11/22 11:27
203 :11/22 13:30
3. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
Page 2-348
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
PROGRAMMING
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-349
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
858 Assign System Emergency Alarm
Assigns the alarm for alarm information to send Remote M&A PC via LAN.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SPEAKER
Used to scroll through options
Used to enter selections
Used to advance next MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 858
Display shows
01:MJA01 ACT:OFF
2. Enter the alarm entry number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to move cursor
02:MJA02 ACT:OFF
3. Enter YES or NO (1, 0) for alarming
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
Right Soft button to save and return step 2
02:MJA02 ACT:ON
POR Restart
Soft Restart
Soft Restart
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button advance to next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
All OFF
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 852 ALARM KEY ASSIGNMENTS
Page 2-350
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
861 System Options
This MMC is set to system miscellaneous options.
No
0
Option
Description
AUTO UPDATE TIME
Sets enable(1) or disable(0) the system automatically time and
date update form ISDN call connection message. If sets enable,
when system receives ISDN call connection message, system
checks valid data of encapsulated time and date, and update
system time and date device.
1
SYSTEM SPPED BIN
Sets max 500(0) or max 950(1) the maximum number of system
speed dial bin. If sets 500 then same in previous system.
If sets 950, can assign system speed dial block is up to 950 bins
and speed dial bin numbers always 3 digits(000 to 999).
Even if station speed dial bin numbers are 3 digits(000 to 049).
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
TRANSFER
Used to scroll through system alarms.
Used to enter selections
Enter/leave option
Used to store data and move to next MMC
Enter/exit MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 861
Display shows
AUTO UPDATE TIME
2. Enter the option number
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTO UPDATE TIME
3. Enter 1 or 0 for option data select
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and
press Right Soft button to move cursor
AUTO UPDATE TIME
DISABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
4. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-351
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
DEFAULT DATA
AUTO UPDATE TIME : DISABLE
SYSTEM SPEED BIN : MAX 500
RELATED ITEMS
MMC 505 ASSIGN TIME AND DATE
MMC 606 ASSING SPEED DIAL BLOCK
MMC 107 KEY EXTENDER
MMC 705 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
MMC 706 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL BY NAME
MMC 722 STATION KEY PROGRAMMING
MMC 723 SYSTEM KEY PROGRAMMING
Page 2-352
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
CHAPTER 2. MMC Programming
890 Initialize Port
This program allows you to initialize items related to call process or DB for specific
station or Trunk line. This will return the port to default condition.
PROGRAM BUTTONS
!
!
!
!
!
VOLUME
KEYPAD
SOFT
SPEAKER
TRANSFER
Used to scroll through system alarms.
Used to enter selections
Enter/leave option
Used to store data and move to next MMC
Enter/exit MMC
ACTION
PROCEDURE
DISPLAY
1. Press Transfer button and enter 890
Display shows
[201] CALL CLEAR
2. Enter the station or Trunk line
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.
[202] CALL CLEAR
3. Enter 0 to call clear only or 1 to initialize port
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to move cursor.
[202] DB INITIAL
4. Enter 1 for YES or 0 for NO
OR
Press Volume button to make selection and press
the Right Soft button to save and return step 2.
[202] DB INITIAL
ARE YOU SURE?NO
ARE YOU SURE?NO
ARE YOU SURE?NO
ARE YOU SURE?YES
5. Press Transfer button and enter to exit
OR
Press Speaker button to advance next MMC
DEFAULT DATA
NONE
RELATED ITEMS
NONE
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Page 2-353
ABBREVIATION
A
AA
Auto Attendant
AC
Analog Current
AOM
Add On Module
AP
Access Point
AT
Audio Tex
BC
Bearer Capability
BRI
Basic Rate Interface
CA
Call Agent
CID
Caller ID
CLI
Calling Line Identification
B
C
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation
CO
Central Office
CODEC
Coder/Decoder
COM
Communication
COS
Class Of Service
CTI
Computer Telephony Integration
DCS
Digital Communication System
DECT
Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications
DGP
Digital Phone
D
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DISA
Direct Inward System Access
DLI
Digital Line Interface
DND
Do Not Disturb
DPIM
Door Phone Interface Module
DSP
Digital Signal Processor
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Abbreviation-1
Abbreviation
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
F
FIFO
First In-First Out
GK
Gatekeeper
HLC
High Layer Capability
G
H
I
ID
Identification
IP
Internet Protocol
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ITP
IP Telephone
KDB
Keyset Daughter Board
LAN
Local Area Network
K
L
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCP
Local Control Processor
LCR
Least Cost Routing
LED
Light Emitting Diode
MGI
Media Gateway Interface
MMC
Man Machine Command
MP
Metering Pulse
MPD
Metering Pulse Detection
M
MOH
Music On Hold
MSN
Monitoring cell Sequence Number, or Multiple Subscriber Number
OHVA
Off-hook Voice Announce
PBX
Private Branch eXchange
O
P
PCMMC PC based Man Machine Communication
Abbreviation-2
PRI
Primary Rate Interface
PRS
Polarity Reverse Detection
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
Abbreviation
Q
Q-SIG
Q-Signaling
QoS
Quality of Service
RAS
Registration, Admissions and Status signaling
SCP
Switch Control Processor
SIO
Serial Input and Output
SLI
Single Line Interface
SLT
Single Line Telephone
R
S
FMDB
Smart Media card Data Base
SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording
SOHO
Small Office Home Office
TEPRI
T1 E1 PRI
TRK
TrunK
UA
User Agent, or Universal Answer
UCD
Uniform Call Distribution
T
U
V
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
VM
Voice Mail
VMS
Voice Mail System
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network
WLI
Wireless LAN Interface
W
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
Abbreviation-3
Abbreviation
OfficeServ 12 Programming Guide/Ed.00
This page is intentionally left blank.
Abbreviation-4
© SAMSUNG Electronics Co., Ltd.
OfficeServ 12
Programming Guide
©2003 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Information in this document is proprietary to SAMSUNG
Electronics Co., Ltd
No information contained here may be copied, translated,
transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written
consent of SAMSUNG.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Download PDF